Annexure D - Specialist Studies.pdf

Annex D

Specialist Studies

D1-Air Quality Study

D2- Noise Impact Assessments

D3- Fire Risk Assessment

D4-Traffic Impact Assessment

Annex D1

Air Quality Study

AIR QUALITY SPECIALIST STUDY: VOPAK GROWTH 4 PROJECT

AIR QUALITY SPECIALIST STUDY FOR VOPAK’S GROWTH 4 PROJECT

Issued by: Issued to:

uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd P O Box 20622 Durban North, 4016

ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd Suite S005, 17 The Boulevard Westway Office Park Westville, 3635

Report No. uMN090-16 i


Report details Client: ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd Report title: Air Quality Specialist Study For Vopak’s Growth 4 Project Project: uMN045-16 Report number: uMN090-16 Version: Draft Author details Author: Yegeshni Moodley, Sarisha Perumal and Atham Raghunandan Reviewer: Mark Zunckel This report has been produced by uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd for ERM Southern Africa representing Vopak. No part of the report may be reproduced in any manner without written permission from the Vopak, ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd and uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd. When used as a reference this report should be cited as follows: uMoya-NILU (2016): Air Quality Specialist Study for Vopak’s Growth 4 Project, June 2016, uMN090-16.

Report No. uMN090-16 ii


GLOSSARY OF ACRONYMS, TERMS AND UNITS

AEL Atmospheric Emission Licence BAT Best Available Technology C6H6 Benzene EIA Environmental Impact Assessment

Emission The direct or indirect release of substances, vibrations, heat or noise from individual or diffuse sources in an installation into the air, water or land.

NEM: AQA National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act (Act No. 39 of 2004) NO Nitrogen oxide NO2 Nitrogen dioxide NOX Oxides of nitrogen (NOX = NO + NO2) PM10 Particulate matter with a diameter less than 10 microns PM2.5 Particulate matter with a diameter less than 2.5 microns SAWS South African Weather Service

SO2 Sulphur dioxide μg/m3 Micrograms per cubic meter VOC Volatile organic compound

Report No. uMN090-16 iii


Report No. uMN090-16 iv

DECLARATION Air Quality Specialist study for the EIA for Vopak’s Growth 4 Project Specialist: uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd Contact person: Mark Zunckel

Postal address: P O Box 20622, Durban North Postal code: 4016 Cell: 083 690 2728

Telephone: 031 262 3265 Fax: 031 262 3266

E-mail: [email protected]

Professional affiliation Registered Natural Scientist with South African Council for Natural Scientific Professionals, (400449/04)

Project Consultant: uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd Contact person: Mark Zunckel

Postal address: P O Box 20622, Durban North Postal code: 4016 Cell: 083 690 2728

Telephone: 031 262 3265 Fax: 031 262 3266

E-mail: [email protected] I, MARK ZUNCKEL, declare that – I act as the independent specialist in this matter;

I do not have and will not have any vested interest (either business, financial, personal or other) in the undertaking of the proposed activity, other than remuneration for work performed in compiling the Emission Inventory Report; That there are no circumstances that may compromise my objectivity in performing the work; I have expertise in compiling the Air Quality Specialist Study, including knowledge of the Act, regulations and any guidelines that have relevance to the proposed activity; I will comply with the Act, regulations and all other applicable legislation; I have no, and will not engage in, conflicting interests in the undertaking of the activity; I undertake to disclose to the applicant and the competent authority all material information in my possession that reasonably has or may have the potential of influencing any decision to be taken with respect to the Emission Inventory Report by the competent authority; All the particulars furnished by me in Emission Inventory Report are true and correct; and I realise that a false declaration is an offence in terms of Regulation 71 and is punishable in terms of section 24F of the Act.

Signature of the specialist: Name of company: uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd Date: July 2016


CONTENTS

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 1 1.1 PURPOSE OF THIS REPORT .......................................................................................... 1 1.2 ENTERPRISE DETAILS .................................................................................................... 1 1.3 LOCATION AND EXTENT ............................................................................................. 2 1.4 OVERVIEW OF THE PROJECT ...................................................................................... 5 1.5 AIR POLLUTANTS RESULTING FROM ACTIVITY .................................................. 7 1.6 EMISSION CONTROL OFFICER .................................................................................... 7 1.7 AUTHORISATION DETAILS.......................................................................................... 7 1.8 MODELLING CONTRACTOR ....................................................................................... 7 1.9 SCOPE OF THE ASSESSMENT ....................................................................................... 8 1.10 REPORT STRUCTURE ..................................................................................................... 8

2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION ................................................................................................................... 9 2.1 RAW MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS ......................................................................... 12 2.2 ATMOSPHERIC EMISSIONS ........................................................................................ 13

2.2.1 Air pollutants ...................................................................................................... 13 2.2.1.1 Benzene (C6H6) .................................................................................... 13 2.2.1.2 Toluene (C7H8) ..................................................................................... 13 2.2.1.3 Ethylbenzene (C8H10) .......................................................................... 14 2.2.1.4 Xylene .................................................................................................... 14

2.2.2 Area source emissions ....................................................................................... 14 3 ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK ............................................................................................... 16

3.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 16 3.2 NATIONAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS ................................................. 16

3.2.1 Listed Activities .................................................................................................. 16 3.2.2 Atmospheric Emission Licence ........................................................................ 17 3.2.3 Atmospheric Impact Report ............................................................................. 17 3.2.4 Ambient air quality standards and guidelines .............................................. 17

4 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY .................................................................................. 18 5 BASELINE CONDITIONS ............................................................................................................... 22

5.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 22 5.2 CLIMATE AND METEOROLOGY ............................................................................... 22 5.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY .............................................................................................. 25

6 AIR QUALITY IMPACT ASSESSMENT & MITIGATION MEASURES ................................... 25 6.1 INTRODUCTION ............................................................................................................ 25 6.2 ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY................................................................................. 26

6.2.1 Emission inventory ............................................................................................ 26 6.2.2 Dispersion modelling ........................................................................................ 26 6.2.3 Assessment of impacts ...................................................................................... 30

6.3 ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS ......................................................................................... 30 6.3.1 Assessment scenarios......................................................................................... 30 6.3.2 Dispersion modelling results ............................................................................ 31

6.3.2.1 Predicted maximum concentrations ................................................. 31 6.3.2.2 Predicted benzene concentrations ..................................................... 31 6.3.2.3 Predicted toluene concentrations ...................................................... 33 6.3.2.4 Predicted ethyl benzene concentrations ........................................... 33 6.3.2.5 Predicted xylene concentrations ........................................................ 34

6.3.3 Impact assessment .............................................................................................. 39

Report No. uMN090-16 v


6.4 RECOMMENDED MITIGATION MEASURES .......................................................... 44 6.4.1 Construction and decommissioning ................................................................ 44 6.4.2 Operations ........................................................................................................... 44

6.5 RESIDUAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT CONCLUSIONS ............................................. 44 7 MANAGEMENT & MONITORING ............................................................................................... 44

7.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 44 7.1.1 Construction and decommissioning ................................................................ 44 7.1.2 Operations ........................................................................................................... 45

8 MANAGEMENT & MONITORING ............................................................................................... 45 8.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS ....................................... 45 8.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM ....................................................... 45

9 IMPACT SUMMARY ........................................................................................................................ 46 10 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................ 46 11 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................... 47 APPENDIX 1: MODEL PLAN OF STUDY REPORT ......................................................................... 48

Report No. uMN090-16 vi


1 INTRODUCTION

Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) LTD, is proposing certain upgrading activities at its Farewell and King sites in the Durban Harbour, within the Island View Petrochemical Complex. The project aims to expand and enhance Vopak's infrastructure to facilitate supply of South Africa’s increasing demand for petroleum products and thus improve the security of fuel supply and facilitate the import of cleaner fuels. The Growth 4 project will upgrade tanks and associated infrastructure within existing bunds at the Farewell site where 38 tanks currently make up a total capacity of 32 000 m3. These will be upgraded to 6 tanks of 20 000 m3 and 6 tanks of 5 000 m3 each. The total capacity of the planned expansion is 150 000 m3. Environmental Resources Management Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd (ERM) has been appointed by Vopak Terminal Growth 4 Project, Durban, to undertake the Basic Assessment (BA). In turn, ERM has sub-contracted uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd to undertake the specialist air quality impact assessment for the BA.

1.1 PURPOSE OF THIS REPORT

The objective of this air quality specialist study is to determine the potential impact on ambient air quality arising from proposed activities associated with the construction and operation of the proposed Vopak Growth 4 project and to advise on mitigation measures for identified significant risks/impacts and measures to enhance positive opportunities/impacts of the project.

1.2 ENTERPRISE DETAILS

Entity details for Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) Ltd – Farewell /King Site t/a Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) LTD are listed in Table 1-1, and Responsible Person details in Table 1-2.

Table 1-1: Entity details

Entity Name: Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) Ltd – Farewell /King Site

Trading as: Vopak Terminal Durban

Type of Entity, e.g. Company/Close Corporation/Trust, etc.:

Company

Company/Close Corporation/Trust Registration Number (Registration Numbers if Joint Venture):

1996/011237/07

Registered Address: 105 Taiwan Rd, Island View, 4052

Postal Address: P.O. Box 21030, 4036, Bluff Telephone Number (General): 031 466 9200 Fax Number (General): 031 466 8940 Company Website: https://www.vopak.com/

1


Industry Type/Nature of Trade: Bulk petrochemical storage facility Name of the Landowner/s or Landlord/s: Transnet National Ports Authority Name of Mortgage Bondholder/s (if any): n/a Deeds Office Registration Number of

Mortgage Bond: n/a

Land Use Zoning as per Town Planning Scheme:

Industrial

Land Use Rights if outside Town Planning Scheme:

n/a

Table 1-2: Responsible Person details

Responsible Person Name: Miriam Haffejee

Responsible Person Post: Environmental Officer

Telephone Number: 031 466 9221

Cell Phone Number: 084 440 6761

Fax Number: 031 466 8940

E-mail Address: [email protected]

After Hours Contact Details: 083 307 9551 / 031 466 9248

1.3 LOCATION AND EXTENT

The Vopak Growth 4 project is to be developed on a brown field site currently operated by Vopak within the Island View Complex at the Port of Durban (Figure 1-1). The site is located within an area identified for industrial development. Site information is provided in Table 1-3. Receptors in the vicinity of the proposed project are shown in Figure 1-2.

2


Figure 1-1: The location of the Project Site in Durban (ERM, 2016)

3


Vopak Farewell King Site is located in an urbanised environment in the Island View Cutler Complex in the Port of Durban. This facility forms part of the Durban Port chemical hub. There are several other petrochemical storage depots located near Vopak Farewell King Site such as Engen, Total, Shell, and Bidvest Tank Terminals. Further away from the Cutler Complex are several residential areas. The closest to the depot are Cave Rock (1.95 km to the north-east) and Fynnland (1.09 km to the south-west). Bayhead is 1.63 km away in a south south-westerly direction. Bluff is 4.35 km away in a south-easterly direction, Clairwood is 4.98 km away in a south-westerly direction, Umbilo is 5 km away in a north-westerly direction and Glenwood is 4.5 km away in a north north-westerly direction. The Central Business District (CBD) of Durban is 3.83 km away in a northerly direction, while the Point area is 2.87 km away in a north north-easterly direction.

Table 1-3: Site information

Physical Address of the Licenced Premises: 105 Taiwan Road, Island View, 4052

Description of Site (Where No Street Address):

Lot 112 and 113 of Fynnland of Durban Bay and Lot 114b of Fynnland of Durban Bay

Property Registration Number (Surveyor-General Code):

n/a

Coordinates (latitude, longitude) of Approximate Centre of Operations (Decimal Degrees):

North-south: 31.019580° East-west: -29.893832°

Coordinates (UTM) of Approximate Centre of Operations:

308835.48 m E, 6691363.84 m S

Extent (km²): 0.0742

Elevation Above Mean Sea Level (m) 7

Province: KwaZulu Natal

District/Metropolitan Municipality: eThekwini Municipality

Local Municipality: n/a

Designated Priority Area (if applicable): n/a

4


Figure 1-2

Receptors within 5 km radius from the proposed project, showing the annual windrose at Vopak site

1.4 OVERVIEW OF THE PROJECT

The project will include the following activities: • Demolish 38 tanks with a combined capacity of 32 000 m3, drumming shed and two

gantries, • Build six new tanks of 20 000 m3 for fuels (total capacity 120 000 m3)- three tanks will be

fitted with Internal Floating Roofs (IFRs); • Build six new tanks of 5 000 m3 for Clean Petroleum Products/chemicals/base oils (total

capacity of 30 000 m3). Three tanks will be fitted with Internal Floating Roofs (IFRs); • One additional 16 inch berth line for CPP to berth 2 ; • Two additional 16 inch berth lines for CPP to berth 9 with associated infrastructure; • Two backload pump for fuels (1400 m3/hr max); • Three backload/road loading pumps for base oils/chemicals (300 m3/hr max); • Four truck loading pumps (with space reservation for two future) for fuels (250 m3/ hr

each); • Four new 8 inch pipelines from Farewell to Blend plant;

Refurbish Road loading gantry at King Site for Base oil/Chemicals; • Relocate and upgrade water treatment system for Farewell and King (part of early

works);

5


• New manifold, connected to Fuel 2 manifold, Fuel 2,5 tanks and NMPP; • Upgrade Fuel 2 substation or new substation; • Connection of 16” berth lines to Berth 6 manifold; • Overall Operation and Automation philosophy in line with Fuel 2 and Fuel 3; • Investigate options to connect to site rail sidings; • Upgrade building facilities (ablution and offices).

The Farewell/King Site is the largest of four sites operated by Vopak at the Island View Complex with a current capacity of 160 000 m3. There are 78 tanks on the site with tank sizes ranging from 106 m3 to 8 500 m3. Vopak stores its low-flash chemicals and fuels at the Farewell/King Site. Operations currently occurring at this site include road and rail tanker handling, container handling and shipping. Vopak handles imported product and products destined for export. A pipeline network currently connects the Vopak site and the shipping berths. This network enables the transfer of products between sites, the berths and other companies within the complex. Fuel and chemical products are delivered to and transported from Vopak Farewell/King site by ships via pipeline transfers. Gantries are currently used to load and unload road and rail tankers with a range of non-hazardous and hazardous chemical substances but will removed under the Growth 4 Project. The process flow is illustrated by the schematic in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3: Process flow diagram

PROCESS FLOW

DIAGRAM FOR VOPAK TERMINAL DURBAN

STORAGE TANKS FOR

DIESEL, PETROL AND

OTHER PETROLEUM PRODUCTS

BENZENETOLUENE

ETHYLBENZENEXYLENE

TOC

VAPOUR BALANCING VAPOUR BALANCING

VAPOUR RECOVERY

UNIT

6


1.5 AIR POLLUTANTS RESULTING FROM ACTIVITY

The following key pollutants are associated with Vopak’s Growth 4 project are benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene. These pollutants are classified as toxic or hazardous air pollutants by the US EPA. Toxic air pollutants are pollutants that cause or may cause cancer or other serious health effects. However, their effects normally occur at high concentrations or concentrations not commonly found in the ambient environment. The impacts of toxic air pollutants are generally occupational in nature, that is, at the point of storage. The standards developed for toxic air pollutants are primarily occupational in nature and are applied to workers working in facilities that produce or store these polluting compounds. Of the toxic air pollutants listed above, only benzene has been assigned with a South African ambient air quality standard. The standard for benzene, which is based on an annual average, is 5 μg/m3.

1.6 EMISSION CONTROL OFFICER

The existing Emission Control Officer (ECO) is Carla Manion (SHEQ Compliance Manager), Tel. no.: 031 466 9221, cell no.: 084 440 6761, fax no.: 031 466 8940, email: [email protected]. After hours contact details are 084 440 6761/ 031 4669248. The requirement for a company to designate an ECO is outlined in Section 48(1) of the NEM: AQA, and the requirements of and ECO are defined in Sec 48 (2) of the NEM: AQA.

1.7 AUTHORISATION DETAILS

The competent authority is the eThekwini Metropolitan Municipality. The AQO is Bruce Dale (Tel: (031) 311 3654, email: [email protected]). The site currently operates on a variation AEL, AEL no.: AEL056/S3, first issued on 1 December 2013, and the variation issued on 1 December 2015. This is to operate Listed Activity Subcategory 2.4, Storage and Handling of Petroleum Products.

1.8 MODELLING CONTRACTOR

The dispersion modelling for the AIR for the proposed Vopak Growth 4 project is conducted by: Company: uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd Modellers: Dr Mark Zunckel, Atham Raghunandan and Sarisha Perumal Contact details: Tel: 031 266 7375 Cell: 083 690 2728 Email: [email protected] or [email protected] Dr Zunckel’s curriculum Vitae are included in Appendix 1.

7


1.9 SCOPE OF THE ASSESSMENT

The scope of this air quality impact assessment is:

Attendance and participation in an introductory workshop; Collection and assessment of available ambient air quality data and information to describe the current state of the receiving atmospheric environment; Prepare a baseline environment description; Advise on the air quality standards and guidelines relevant to the project; Collect an inventory of likely atmospheric emissions for the different technology, design and input alternatives and advise on the likely envelope for the impact assessment; Identify air quality impacts associated with the proposed development. This may also require input into the comments and response report to be prepared as part of the stakeholder engagement process during the Impact Assessment Phases of the Project; Undertake a qualitative comparative assessment for the different technology, design and input alternatives; Undertake dispersion modelling in accordance with the legislation for the envelope of the impact assessment; Assess air quality impacts of the Project and the implications for human health by evaluating predicted ambient concentrations of air pollutants with the National Ambient Air Quality Standard (NAAQS) and using EIA criteria prescribed by ERM; Undertake an impact assessment according to ERM’s standard impact assessment methodology; Document results of the impact assessment including proposed mitigation; Input into the environmental management plan as per the format to be prescribed by ERM; Suggest monitoring measures for the construction, operation and decommissioning phases of the project;

1.10 REPORT STRUCTURE

This air quality impact assessment report is structured in the following manner. Chapter 2 provides an overview of the administrative or legal context and includes, licensing, relevant emission standards and ambient air quality standards. The impact assessment methodology is defined in Chapter 3. Chapter 4 includes the baseline or air quality status quo, including a description of climate information and ambient monitoring is presented. The air quality impact assessment in included in Chapter 5 including the assessment methodology, the assessment of impacts and recommendation for impact mitigation. The environmental management requirements are considered in Chapter 6, including input to the Environmental Management Plan (EMP). A summary of impacts are presented in Chapter 7 with conclusions and recommendations in Chapter 8.

8


2 PROJECT DESCRIPTION

Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) LTD, is proposing certain upgrading activities at its Farewell and King sites in the Durban Harbour, within the Island View Petrochemical Complex. The Growth 4 project will upgrade tanks and associated infrastructure within existing bunds at the Farewell site where 38 tanks currently make up a total capacity of 32 000 m3. These will be upgraded to 6 tanks of 20 000 m3 and 6 tanks of 5 000 m3 each. The total capacity of the planned expansion is 150 000 m3.

Table 2-1: Listed activities for the Vopak Growth 4 Project

Listed Activity Number

Category of Listed Activity

Sub-category of the Listed Activity

Name of the Listed Activity

Description of the Listed Activity

1 2. 2.4 Storage and handling of Petroleum Products

Petroleum product storage tanks and product transfer facilities, except those used for liquefied petroleum gas

Table 2-2: Unit processes for the Vopak Growth 4 Project

Unit Process Function of Unit Process

Batch/Continuous Process

Storage Tanks Storage, handling and distribution of petroleum products

Continuous

A schematic of process flow is illustrated in Figure 2-1, indicating the points of atmospheric emissions, and relative location of the process units is shown in the site layout in Figure 2-2.

9


Figure 2-1: A basic block flow diagram for the operation at the Farewell/King site

10


Figure 2-2: Proposed site layout of the Farewell/King Site showing the relative location of the new tanks (in blue block)

11


2.1 RAW MATERIALS AND PRODUCTS

No raw materials are consumed, nor does production take place at the site as it is a storage facility only. This is reflected in Tables 2-3 to 2-5.

Table 2-3: Raw material used at the site

Raw material Maximum

consumption rate Units

n/a - -

Table 2-4: Storage volumes for the Vopak Growth 4 Project

Tank Number

Product Storage Capacity (Quantity)

Units (Quantity/Period)

TK0075 ULP 20 000 m3

TK0076 ULP 20 000 m3

TK0077 ULP 20 000 m3

TK0078 Diesel 20 000 m3

TK0079 Diesel 20 000 m3

TK0080 Diesel 20 000 m3

TK0081 ULP 5 000 m3

TK0082 ULP 5 000 m3

TK0083 ULP 5 000 m3

TK0084 Diesel 5 000 m3



Table 2-5: Energy sources used at the site

Energy source

Sulphur content of fuel

(%)

Ash content of fuel (%)

Maximum permitted

consumption rate

Units

Municipal electricity

0 0 1 077 900* kWh/yr.

* Actual consumption

12


2.2 ATMOSPHERIC EMISSIONS

2.2.1 Air pollutants

The introduction of ULP and diesel at the site implies that benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene (referred to BTEX) are assessed as these compounds are associated with the two products. An overview of BTEX is provided below including the respective ambient air quality standards, guidelines and odour thresholds.

2.2.1.1 Benzene (C6H6)

Benzene (C6H6) is a natural component of crude oil, petrol, diesel and other liquid fuels and is emitted when these fuels are combusted. Diesel exhaust emissions therefore contain benzene. After exposure to benzene, several factors determine whether harmful health effects will occur, as well as the type and severity of such health effects. These factors include the amount of benzene to which an individual is exposed and the length of time of the exposure. For example, brief exposure (5–10 minutes) to very high levels of benzene (14000 – 28000 μg/m3) can result in death (ATSDR, 2007). Lower levels (980 – 4200 μg/m3) can cause drowsiness, dizziness, rapid heart rate, headaches, tremors, confusion and unconsciousness. In most cases, people will stop feeling these effects when they are no longer exposed and begin to breathe fresh air. Inhalation of benzene for long periods may result in harmful effects in the tissues that form blood cells, especially the bone marrow. These effects can disrupt normal blood production and cause a decrease in important blood components. Excessive exposure to benzene can be harmful to the immune system, increasing the chance for infection. Both the International Agency for Cancer Research and the US-EPA have determined that benzene is carcinogenic to humans as long-term exposure to benzene can cause leukaemia, a cancer of the blood-forming organs.

2.2.1.2 Toluene (C7H8)

Toluene is a colourless, flammable liquid with an odour threshold of 2.5 ppm (ACGIH, 2001). The major use of toluene is as a mixture added to gasoline to improve the octane ratings. It is be emitted into the air by motor vehicles, industries using or producing toluene, during storage or when using products that contain toluene. The main route of exposure to toluene is inhalation. About half of the inhaled toluene is absorbed by the human body and is deposited in fatty tissue and tissue rich in blood supply, such as the brain, liver, kidney and fat, but more than of the deposited toluene is removed from the body within 12 hours (ATSDR, 1997). There are no South African ambient air guidelines for toluene. The South African occupational exposure limit for toluene is 50 ppm (188 mg/m3) (SA, 2006). The WHO non-cancer 30-minute guideline of 1000 μg/m3 is based on odour annoyance (WHO, 2000). The WHO 24-hour guideline is 7 500 3 is based on negative effects on the central nervous system (CNS) effects in workers (WHO, 2000).

13


2.2.1.3 Ethylbenzene (C8H10)

Ethyl benzene is a colourless flammable liquid with an aromatic odour (odour threshold 2.3 ppm 3) (ACGIH, 2001). It is primarily used in the manufacture of styrene (used in

polystyrene products) and is the starting product for a wide variety of plastics, synthetic rubber and latex products based on styrene. Ethylbenzene is used as a solvent for resins and is a minor component of gasoline. Ethylbenzene may be emitted to the atmosphere from industries using or producing ethylbenzene or coal, from motor vehicle exhausts, tobacco smoking and evaporation from contaminated soil and water. The main route of exposure to ethylbenzene is inhalation when it is rapidly and efficiently absorbed. Hereafter, it is distributed to adipose tissue where approximately 2% is retained. Ethylbenzene has a low acute and chronic toxicity for animals and humans. Prolonged skin contact with the liquid may cause dermatitis due to the de-fatting action of ethylbenzene. There are no South African ambient air guidelines for ethyl benzene. The WHO guideline for ethylbenzene is 22 000 μg/m3 as an annual average. A health-based guideline for ethylbenzene of 2 000 μg/m3, an hourly average (Government of Alberta, 2011).

2.2.1.4 Xylene

Xylene is a colourless flammable liquid with an aromatic odour (odour threshold between 0.07 and 40 ppm (ACGIH, 2001). It is used in the production of solvents and in paints and coatings. It occurs naturally in coal tar and petroleum. Xylene may be released to air by industries using or producing xylene, by motor vehicle exhaust fumes and by using consumer products that contain xylene as well as by evaporation from contaminated soil and water. Inhalation is the most important route of exposure when xylene is rapidly absorbed and 50 to 70% is retained in the body. Long-term exposure to concentrations found in occupational environment may cause upper respiratory irritation and central nervous system effects such as headaches, dizziness and tremors. ACGIH and EPA consider xylene as not classifiable as a human carcinogen. There are no ambient air guidelines available for xylene in South Africa. The WHO (2000) ambient air guidelines for xylenes are a 24-hour guideline value of 4 3 (uncertainty factor 60) based on CNS effects in humans and an annual guideline value of 3 (uncertainty factor 1 000) based on neurotoxicity in rats. An hourly guideline value of 2 300 μg/m3 and 24-hour guideline of 700 μg/m3 was sourced from Alberta, Canada (Government of Alberta, 2011). 2.2.2 Area source emissions No point sources are assessed as part of the proposed development, and therefore no point source characteristics are included. Storage tanks are grouped as area sources and are described in Table 2-6 and illustrated in Figure 2-3. Emission rates are provided in Table 2-7. Emissions are estimated for the baseline, future and cumulative tank capacity scenario’s at the site for total organic compounds, as well as the BTEX group of organic compounds.

14


These are generated through standing and working losses from the tanks. Tank technology plays a significant role in mitigating emissions.

Figure 2-3: Area sources at Vopak

Table 2-6: Area source parameters Source

ID Source Description

Latitude (decimal degrees) of SW corner

Longitude (decimal degrees) of SW corner

Height of Release Above Ground (m)

Area (m2)

Area Source 1

Storage tanks -29.893537° 31.020189° 16.47 13682.49

Area Source 2

Storage tanks -29.894226° 31.018001° 16.80 3354.96

Area Source 3

Storage tanks -29.894023° 31.018936° 17.86 2828.38

Area Source 4

Storage tanks -29.894618° 31.018283° 16.00 2817.00

Area Source 5

Storage tanks -29.894469° 31.019197° 19.00 3233.00

Area Source 6

Storage tanks -29.893125° 31.021615° 15.70 2165.00

Area Source 7

Storage tanks -29.893534° 31.021224° 16.27 2202.00

Area Source 8

Storage tanks -29.893996° 31.021298° 27.20 2632.00

15


Table 2-7: Area source emissions (in tons/annum) Baseline Growth 4 Cumulative TOC 49.33 21.34 63.30

Benzene 0.02 0.12 0.14 Toluene 0.06 0.25 0.08 Ethylbenzene 0.01 0.03 0.25 Xylene 0.10 0.34 0.41

3 ADMINISTRATIVE FRAMEWORK

3.1 INTRODUCTION

In South Africa ambient air quality is regulated in terms of the National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act (No. 39 0f 2004) (NEM: AQA), the Air Quality Amendment Act (Act No. 20 of 2014) and supporting regulations. The legal requirements regarding the operation of the proposed development are discussed in the following sections.

3.2 NATIONAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

3.2.1 Listed Activities

Section 21 of the NEM: AQA required that the Minister publishes a list of activities which result in atmospheric emissions which the Minister believes have or may have a significant detrimental effect on the environment, including health, social conditions, economic conditions, ecological conditions or cultural heritage, so-called Listed Activities. The first list was published in Government Notice No. 248 of 31 March 2010 (DEA, 2010), and a revised list followed on 22 November 2013 (DEA, 2013a). The storage and handling of petroleum products is classified as a Listed Activity1,2 (Category 2, sub-category 2.4). The Minimum Emission Standards that apply to the proposed development are stated in Table 3-1.

Table 3-1: Minimum emission standards (sub-category 2-4, (DEA, 2013a))

2.4 (b) Storage and Handling of Petroleum Products Liquid Storage Vessels Requirements

Type 1: Vapour pressure up to 14 kPa

Fixed-roof tank vented to atmosphere, or as per Type 2 and 3

Type 2: Vapour pressure above 14 kPa and up to 91 kPa with a throughput of less than 50'000 m3 per annum

Fixed-roof tank with Pressure Vacuum Vents fitted as a minimum, to prevent "breathing" losses, or as per Type 3

16


Type 3: Above 14 kPa and up to 91 kPa with a throughput greater than 50'000 m3/year

a) External floating-roof tank with primary rim seal and secondary rim seal for tank with a diameter greater than 20m, or b) fixed-roof tank with internal floating deck / roof fitted with primary seal, or c) fixed-roof tank with vapour recovery system.

3.2.2 Atmospheric Emission Licence The consequence of listing an activity is described in Section 22 of the NEM: AQA, i.e. that no person may conduct a Listed Activity without a provisional Atmospheric Emission Licence or and Atmospheric Emission Licence (AEL). The application process for an AEL is described in Section 37 of the NEM: AQA. The application should be lodged to the licensing authority with the prescribed licensing fee and documentation required by the licensing authority. Regulations prescribing the AEL processing fee were gazetted on 11 March 2016 (DEA, 2016). The processing fee for new Listed Activities of R10 000 per Listed Activity should be paid on or before the date of the submission of the application. 3.2.3 Atmospheric Impact Report The application for an AEL is a fundamental component of the environmental authorisation process. It is supported by an air quality specialist study in the form of an Atmospheric Impact Report (AIR) (Section 30 of the NEM: AQA). The format the AIR are defined in regulations published on 11 October 2013 (DEA, 2013b). The methodology and level of the assessment required is defined in the DEA’s guideline for dispersion modelling (DEA, 2014). All the requirements of an AIR are addressed in this air quality impact report. 3.2.4 Ambient air quality standards and guidelines

The effects of air pollutants on human health occur in a number of ways with short-term, or acute effects, and chronic, or long-term, effects. Different groups of people are affected differently, depending on their level of sensitivity, with the elderly and young children being more susceptible. The factors that link the concentration of an air pollutant to an observed health effect are the level and the duration of exposure to that particular air pollutant. The National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) were published in 2009 for SO2, NO2, CO, O3, benzene and PM10 (DEA, 2009) and for PM2.5 (DEA, 2012). Relevant to this

3, as an annual average. In the absence of national standards for toluene, ethylbenzene and xylene relevant ambient guidelines and odour thresholds are applied (Table 3-2).

17


No ambient air quality guideline could be sourced for acrylonitrile. Because acrylonitrile is carcinogenic in animals and there is limited evidence of its carcinogenicity in humans, it is treated as if it were a human carcinogen. At an air concentration of 1 /m3, the lifetime risk is estimated to be 2 × 10-5 (WHO, 2000).

Table 3-2: Ambient air quality guidelines and odour thresholds Compound Guideline Averaging period Source

Toluene 3

3 Odour annoyance 24-hour guideline

WHO WHO

Ethylbenzene 3 3

Odour threshold 1-hr guideline

Govt of Alberta Govt of Alberta

Xylene 3

3 1-hr guideline 24-hr guideline

Govt of Alberta Govt of Alberta

4 IMPACT ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY

Predicted impacts relating to air quality are described according to relevant characteristics, ie, impact type, scale of impact, impact duration, frequency of occurrence, and extent of impact. The terminology used to describe impact characteristics is shown in Table 4.1.

Table 4-1: Impact characteristic terminology Characteristic Definition Designation Type A descriptor indicating the relationship of the

impact to the Project (in terms of cause and effect)

Direct Indirect Induced

Extent The “reach” of the impact (e.g., confined to a small area around the Project Footprint, projected for several kilometres, etc)

Local Regional International

Duration The time period over which a resource / receptor is affected

Temporary Short-term Long-term Permanent

Scale The size of the impact (e.g., the size of the area damaged or impacted, the fraction of a resource that is lost or affected, etc)

Numerical value relates to intensity

Frequency A measure of the constancy or periodicity of the impact.

Numerical value relates to frequency

18


The definitions for the impact type designations are shown in Table 4.2. Table 4-2: Impact type definitions Direct Impacts that result from a direct interaction between the Project

and a resource/receptor (e.g., between occupation of a plot of land and the habitats which are affected)

Indirect Impacts that follow on from the direct interactions between the Project and its environment as a result of subsequent interactions within the environment (e.g., viability of a species population resulting from loss of part of a habitat as a result of the Project occupying a plot of land).

Induced Impacts that result from other activities (which are not part of the Project) that happen as a consequence of the Project (e.g., influx of camp followers resulting from the importation of a large Project workforce).

The characteristics and definitions in Table 4.2 apply to planned and unplanned events. An additional characteristic that pertains only to unplanned events is likelihood. The likelihood of an unplanned event occurring is designated using a qualitative scale (Table 4.3).

Table 4-3: Definitions for likelihood designation Unlikely The event is unlikely but may occur at some time during normal

operating conditions Possible The event is likely to occur at some time during normal

operating conditions Likely The event will occur during normal operating conditions (i.e., it

is essentially inevitable) The definitions for the impact extent designations are shown in Table 4.4.

Table 4-4: Impact extent definitions Local Limited to the Project site and the boundaries of the

Municipality Regional Extends beyond the boundaries of the Municipality International Extends beyond the boundaries of South Africa

The definitions for the impact duration designations are shown in Table 4.5. Table 4-5: Impact duration definitions Temporary Acute impact as a result of operational upset condition Short-term Acute (hours to days) impact as a result of normal project

operations Long-term Chronic (years) impact as a result of normal project activities Permanent Permanent (lifetime) impact as a result of normal project

activities

19


The definitions for the impact scale designations are shown in Table 4.6. Table 4-6: Impact scale definitions Rank Score Definition High 3 Exceedances of the limit value of the NAAQS at sensitive

receptors Medium 2 Exceedances of the limit value of the NAAQS at non-sensitive

receptors Low 1 No exceedances of the limit value of the NAAQS

The definitions for the impact frequency designations are shown in Table 4.7.

Table 4-7: Impact frequency definitions Rank Score Definition High 3 Exceedances of the tolerance of the NAAQS at sensitive

receptors Medium 2 Exceedances of the tolerance of the NAAQS at non-sensitive

receptors Low 1 No exceedances of the tolerance the NAAQS

Once an impact’s characteristics are defined, magnitude is assigned to each impact. Magnitude is a function of extent, duration, scale and frequency. For unplanned events only, magnitude incorporates the ‘likelihood’ factor discussed above. Magnitude describes the intensity of the change that is predicted to occur in the resource/receptor as a result of the impact. The magnitude designations are:

Positive Negligible Small Medium Large

The other principal impact evaluation step is a definition of the sensitivity/ vulnerability/ importance of the impacted resource/receptor. Factors considered include physical, biological, cultural or human and legal protection, government policy, stakeholder views and economic value. Sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations themselves universally consistent, i.e. low, medium and high, but the definitions vary on a resource/receptor basis (Table 4.8).

Table 4-8: Impact duration definitions Low Unpopulated areas Medium Commercial or industrialised areas High Residential areas

Once magnitude of impact and sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of resource/receptor have been characterized, the significance can be assigned for each impact using the matrix in Figure 4.1. The matrix applies universally to all resources/receptors, and all impacts to these resources/receptors.

20


Figure 4-1: Impact significance

An impact of negligible significance is one where a resource/receptor (including people) will essentially not be affected in any way by a particular activity or the predicted effect is deemed to be ‘imperceptible’ or is indistinguishable from natural background variations. An impact of minor significance is one where a resource/receptor will experience a noticeable effect, but the impact magnitude is sufficiently small and/or the resource/receptor is of low sensitivity/vulnerability/ importance. In either case, the magnitude should be well within applicable standards. An impact of moderate significance has an impact magnitude that is within applicable standards, but falls somewhere in the range from a threshold below which the impact is minor, up to a level that might be just short of breaching a legal limit. An impact of major significance is one where an accepted limit or standard may be exceeded, or large magnitude impacts occur to highly valued/sensitive resource/receptors.

Once the significance of an impact has been characterized, the next step is to evaluate what mitigation and enhancement measures are warranted. Considering emission to the atmosphere and resultant impacts, the following mitigation applies: Avoid at Source, Reduce at Source: avoiding or reducing at source through the design of the Project (e.g., consideration of emission control equipment in the design). Abate on Site: add something to the design to abate the impact (e.g., use of emission control equipment in operation of the plant).

21


5 BASELINE CONDITIONS

5.1 INTRODUCTION

eThekwini Metropolitan Municipality (eThekwini Municipality) is located on the east coast of South Africa in the Province of KwaZulu-Natal (KZN) and spans an area of approximately 2 297 km2. eThekwini Municipality is one of eight Category A municipalities in South Africa, and one of 11 district municipalities in KZN. eThekwini Municipality includes the City of Durban, covering 225.91 km2. Durban is the largest city in KZN and home to the Port of Durban, the busiest port in Africa. Durban is a major manufacturing hub and tourism destination. For this air quality assessment the baseline conditions include a description of the climate and meteorology, existing sources of atmospheric emissions and the current state of ambient air quality.

5.2 CLIMATE AND METEOROLOGY

eThekwini Municipality is located on South Africa’s east coast, at -level at the

coast to more than 500 m above sea level in the Outer West. Its sub-tropical latitude and proximity to the warm Indian Ocean ensures warm temperatures, high humidity, and summer rainfall. The lower elevation on the coast ensures higher temperatures than on the escarpment towards the Outer West. The general circulation of the atmosphere and its perturbations also influences the climate of a location. The main synoptic-scale features that control atmospheric circulation over the east coast of South Africa and eThekwini are the Indian Ocean Anticyclone (IOA), the sub-continental high, westerly waves and the coastal low. The strength of the IOA and its relative location to the South African coast plays a major role in eThekwini’s climate. In summer, the IOA is more intense and is situated relatively close to the sub-continent with a low pressure trough adjacent to the South African interior. This results in strong insolation, hot temperatures and north-easterly winds. It also results in advection of tropical air over the eastern interior and coast which results in convection summer showers and thundershowers. In winter the main synoptic features move northward as the sun moves northward. The IOA is weaker and situated further north and a semi-permanent high pressure system establishes over the South African interior. Temperatures are cooler and the high pressure system results in generally clear skies and light winds. The westerly wave systems that move south of the country in summer move northward in winter. The generally mild and calm winter conditions are sometimes interrupted by the passage of cold fronts, resulting in cold temperatures, winter rain and south-westerly winds.

22


Coastal lows move northward up the KZN coast, particularly in winter ahead of westerly waves. Hot and dry Berg Winds are often associated with well-developed coastal lows when winter temperatures can exceed -easterly winds ahead of the low, followed by so-called southwesterly busters occur. Land-sea breezes are common winter meso-scale circulation features on the east coast in winter resulting in off-shore winds during the day and generally onshore winds at night. Climate statistics for the South African Weather Service (SAWS) station at the old Durban International Airport for the 30-year period 1961 to 1990 were reviewed (SAWB, 1998). Average monthly temperatures are presented in Figure 5-1 with the average monthly rainfall. eThekwini has a humid subtropical climate (Cfa) according to the Köppen climate classification. It experiences hot and humid summers and warm, relatively dry winters. Summer rainfall starts in late October to early April. The average temperature in summer ranges from 21 °C to 25 °C, but daytime maximums can exceed 30 °C. During the summer the average humidity is in the region of 70%. In winter the average temperature is between 16 °C and 19 °C, with average maximum daytime temperatures reaching 23 °C. During the winter the average humidity is in the region of 55%. The annual average rainfall is 1 009 mm.

Figure 5-1: Average monthly maximum, minimum and daily temperature at the old Durban International Airport and the average monthly rainfall in mm (SAWS, 1998)

Wind patterns in eThekwini are described by windroses for the 3-year period 2010 to 2012 at the old Durban International Airport (Figure 5-2). This monitoring station is suitably positioned to provide representative wind climatology for the eastern parts of eThekwini. The annual, daytime (06:00 to 17:00) and night time (18:00 to 05:00) windroses are shown. Windroses simultaneously depict the frequency of occurrence of hourly winds from the 16 cardinal wind directions and in different wind speed classes. Wind direction is given as the direction from which the wind blows, i.e., southwesterly winds blow from the southwest.

23


Wind speed is given in m/s, and each arc in the windrose represents a percentage frequency of occurrence. The dominant winds in eThekwini are from the north to north-northeast (21%) or from the south to southwest (29%), where the winds are typically light to moderate, but can exceed 11 m/s at times. These winds are mostly a result of the dominant synoptic-scale circulation. Light north-northwest to east-southeast winds result mostly from regional scale topographical drainage and land breezes and occur 24% of the time, mostly in winter and at night. The higher frequency of light off-shore winds at night is clearly seen. Easterly on-shore winds are less infrequent and occur only 17% of the time. Calm conditions occur for 9% of the time.

Figure 5-2: Annual windrose (left), day time (centre) and night time (right) at the old Durban International Airport for the 3-year period 2010 to 2012

In eThekwini the dispersion potential is relatively good during the day in both winter and summer as a result of hot daytime temperatures and a relatively high frequency of moderate winds, particularly along the coast. It is be better on summer days than winter days. This is attributed to stronger thermal mixing and night-time temperature inversions which are weaker, break up earlier and establish later in the day. Secondly, there is a higher frequency of stronger winds in summer than in winter. At night the dispersion potential is poorer and this effect is more pronounced in the winter. Surface temperature inversions are stronger and exist for longer than in summer, particularly over the central and western parts of the municipality. eThekwini experiences a high frequency of moderate to strong winds, being located on the coast. The influence of the warm Indian Ocean impedes the development of strong temperature inversions and air pollutants generally disperse well along the coast. Persistent

24


inversions can develop inland, especially in valleys in the winter, when pollutants can accumulate. Air quality in eThekwini is therefore relatively good.

5.3 AMBIENT AIR QUALITY

Emissions of priority pollutants in eThekwini result from a number of different source types. These include industrial facilities that are regulated in terms of their Atmospheric Emission Licences, i.e. Listed Activities. They also include industrial facilities that operate medium-sized boilers, which are regulated as Controlled Emitters. Smaller facilities that operate Fuel Burning Devices of less than 10 MW heat input are regulated in terms of municipal by-laws. Transportation, which includes motor vehicles and activities at the Port of Durban and the King Shaka International Airport (KSIA), is an important source of emissions. Residential fuel burning is also a source of air pollutants as many homes do not have access to electricity in eThekwini Municipality. Here wood, coal, paraffin and gas are used for cooking, lighting and heating purposes. In the north, sugarcane burning is a seasonal source of air pollutants. There are a number of quarries in eThekwini, which are a source of dust. In eThekwini, crude oil refining, bulk storage and handling of petroleum products, fuel combustion by industry and motor vehicles and the treatment of industrial effluent are sources of benzene. eThekwini Municipality started ambient air quality monitoring in the 1990’s using smoke and SO2 bubblers. This monitoring was augmented in 2005 with 14 fully automated ambient air quality monitoring stations. In 2013 the network expanded with a further four ambient monitoring stations, while the smoke and SO2 bubbler stations continued to operate. The municipality has also done a number of monitoring campaigns. A good record therefore exists for the criteria pollutants, including SO2, NO2, CO, O3, PM10 and benzene. eThekwini Municipality has operated a continuous benzene monitor at Settlers School since 2011. The annual average concentration complied with the relevant 3 at the time, however, the site would be non-compliant with the new annual benzene limit value of 5 3 if the concentration levels persisted to 2015 (Table 5-1).

Table 5-1: Annual average benzene concentration at Settlers School from 2011 to 2013 at the continuous monitoring station

Year 3) 2011 1.85 2012 5.04 2013 5.03

6 AIR QUALITY IMPACT ASSESSMENT & MITIGATION MEASURES

6.1 INTRODUCTION

25


Emissions of air pollutants from the Vopak Growth 4 project will result during construction and decommissioning, and operations. Construction and decommissioning activities generate dust, and during operations the storage of ULP and diesel result in BTEX emissions. The assessment of impacts associated with the construction and decommissioning of the plant is done qualitatively. The assessment of impacts associated with operations is quantitative, using dispersion modelling.

6.2 ASSESSMENT METHODOLOGY

6.2.1 Emission inventory

The US EPA TANKS software (USEPA, 1999) model was used to estimate emissions from storage tanks. The equations used in the USEPA TANKS software (USEPA, 1999) model to calculate emissions were developed by the American Petroleum Institute (API). API retains the copyright to these equations and the TANKS model is available for public use. TANKS allows the input of specific information concerning storage tanks (e.g. tank type, dimensions, construction, paint condition), liquid fuel contents, handling protocols (e.g. type of fuel, volume of fuel handled monthly) and site-specific ambient meteorological information. Speciation of the product into its resultant emissions is based on the composition of the emitted chemical compounds in the product. The model also requires the input of representative meteorological data. Climatologically representative wind, temperature, pressure and solar radiation data for Durban was used.

6.2.2 Dispersion modelling

The approach to the dispersion modelling in this assessment is based on the requirements of the DEA guideline for dispersion modelling (DEA, 2014). An overview of the dispersion modelling approach is provided here, with further detail in the appendix.

Models used A Level-3 air quality assessment is conducted in situations where the purpose of the assessment requires a detailed understanding of the air quality impacts (time and space variation of the concentrations) and when it is important to account for causality effects, calms, non-linear plume trajectories, spatial variations in turbulent mixing, multiple source types and chemical transformations (DEA, 2014). A Level-3 assessment may be used to assess contaminants in meteorologically complex situations such as mountain valley flows, reversals, sea breeze, and fumigation. A Level-3 assessment is clearly necessary for the air quality assessment for the Vopak Growth 4 project. The Model Plan of Study (Appendix 1) provides details on the modelling approach. A summary is provided in the following paragraphs. The DEA recommend the US EPA approved CALPUFF dispersion model (http://www.src.com/calpuff/calpuff1.htm) for Level 3 assessments (DEA, 2014).

26


CALPUFF is a multi-layer, multi-species non-steady-state puff dispersion model that simulates the effects of time and space varying meteorological conditions on pollution transport, transformation and removal. CALPUFF can be applied on scales of tens to hundreds of kilometres. It includes algorithms for sub-grid scale effects (such as terrain impingement), as well as longer range effects (such as pollutant removal due to wet scavenging and dry deposition, chemical transformation, and visibility effects of particulate matter concentrations). To address the challenges relating to data scarcity in the area of interest, The Air Pollution Model (TAPM) meteorological data is used to supplement the meteorology in the modelling domain. Mesoscale models such as TAPM use gridded meteorological data and physics algorithms to produce meteorological fields at defined horizontal grid resolutions and in multiple vertical levels over a large domain. They offer an alternative to meteorological measurements for advanced dispersion models. Providing actual surface observations to mesoscale meteorological model simulations produces more accurate meteorological fields, as the actual observations are used to “nudge” the model in its solutions. TAMP and CALPUFF parameterisation

TAPM is set-up in a nested configuration of three domains centred on the project area (Figure 6-1). The outer domain is 480 km by 480 km at a 24 km grid resolution, the middle domain is 240 km by 240 km at a 12 km grid resolution and the inner domain is 60 km by 60 km at a 3 km grid resolution, corresponding with the CALPUFF domain. The nesting configuration ensures that topographical effects on meteorology are captured and that the modelled meteorology is well resolved and characterised across the boundaries of the inner domain, i.e. the CALPUFF dispersion modelling domain. Three years (2012, 2013 and 2014) of hourly observed meteorological data from SAWS meteorological station at the old Durban International Airport is input to TAPM to ‘nudge’ the modelled meteorology towards the observations and to create a continuous meteorological input file for each domain. The model outputs include hourly wind speed and direction, temperature, relative humidity, total solar radiation, net radiation, sensible heat flux, evaporative heat flux, convective velocity scale, precipitation, mixing height, friction velocity and Obukhov length. The subset of the entire TAPM model output in the form of pre-processed gridded surface meteorological data fields will be input into CALMET. This approach eliminates potential issues associated with missing observational data. Upper air data is included in the pre-processed TAPM meteorological fields. The upper air data is spatially and temporally continuous, and includes data at 27 vertical levels between 10 m to 5 km above ground level. There are more levels close to the surface and decreasing with increasing altitude up to the last level.

27


The CALPUFF modelling domain of 3 600 km2 is 60 km (west-east) by 60 km (north-south) and will be centred on the respective site. It will consist of a uniformly spaced receptor grid with 0.5 km spacing, giving 14 400 grid cells (120 x 120 grid cells). The parameterisation of key variables that are applied in CALMET and CALPUFF are indicated in Table 6-1 and 6-2.

Figure 6-1: TAPM and CALPUFF modelling domains for the site

28


Table 6-1: Parameterisation of key variables for CALMET

Parameter Model value 12 vertical cell face heights (m) 0, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500,

3000, 4000 Coriolis parameter (per second) 0.0001 Empirical constants for mixing

height equation Neutral, mechanical: 1.41

Convective: 0.15 Stable: 2400 Overwater, mechanical: 0.12 Minimum potential

temperature lapse rate (K/m) 0.001

Depth of layer above convective mixing height through which lapse rate is computed (m)

200

Wind field model Diagnostic wind module Surface wind extrapolation Similarity theory Restrictions on extrapolation of

surface data No extrapolation as modelled upper air data field is applied

Radius of influence of terrain features (km)

5

Radius of influence of surface stations (km)

Not used as continuous surface data field is applied

Table 6-2: Parameterisation of key variables for CALPUFF

Parameter Model value Chemical transformation Default NO2 conversion factor is applied Wind speed profile Urban Calm conditions Wind speed < 0.5 m/s Plume rise Transitional plume rise, stack tip downwash, and

partial plume penetration is modelled Dispersion CALPUFF used in PUFF mode Dispersion option Pasquill-Gifford coefficients are used for rural and

McElroy-Pooler coefficients are used for urban Terrain adjustment

method Partial plume path adjustment

29


Model accuracy

Air quality models attempt to predict ambient concentrations based on “known” or measured parameters, such as wind speed, temperature profiles, solar radiation and emissions. There are however, variations in the parameters that are not measured, the so-called “unknown” parameters as well as unresolved details of atmospheric turbulent flow. Variations in these “unknown” parameters can result in deviations of the predicted concentrations of the same event, even though the “known” parameters are fixed. There are also “reducible” uncertainties that result from inaccuracies in the model, errors in input values and errors in the measured concentrations. These might include poor quality or unrepresentative meteorological, geophysical and source emission data, errors in the measured concentrations that are used to compare with model predictions and inadequate model physics and formulation used to predict the concentrations. “Reducible” uncertainties can be controlled or minimised. This is done by using accurate input data, preparing the input files correctly, checking and re-checking for errors, correcting for odd model behaviour, ensuring that the errors in the measured data are minimised. Models recommended in the DEA dispersion modelling guideline (DEA, 2014) have been evaluated using a range of modelling test kits (http://www.epa.gov./scram001). CALPUFF is one of the models that have been evaluated and it is therefore not mandatory to perform any modelling evaluations. Rather the accuracy of the modelling in this assessment is enhanced by every effort to minimise the “reducible” uncertainties in input data and model parameterisation.

6.2.3 Assessment of impacts

The air quality impacts associated with dust and vehicle exhaust emissions during construction and decommissioning are assessed qualitatively. The comparison of the predicted (modelled) ambient concentrations of the respective compounds with the relevant ambient standard or guideline or odour threshold forms the basis of the impact assessment. For BTEX the maximum predicted concentrations is used and are plotted as isopleths on a map of the assessment area.

6.3 ASSESSMENT OF IMPACTS

6.3.1 Assessment scenarios

Three scenarios are assessed, these are: Scenario 1 the current baseline, i.e. the impact of emissions resulting from the existing

tanks configuration; Scenario 2 for the new tank configuration, i.e. Vopak Growth 4 only; Scenario 3 the future cumulative effect, i.e. Vopak Growth 4 and the remaining tanks.

30


6.3.2 Dispersion modelling results

The maximum predicted ambient BTEX concentrations from the dispersion modelling for emission Scenarios 1, 2 and 3 are presented as isopleth maps over the modelling domain.

6.3.2.1 Predicted maximum concentrations

The annual average at the points of predicted highest ground-level concentration presented in Table 6.3 for each scenario.

Table 6-3: Annual average concentration at the points of predicted maximum ground-level

3 Averaging period Pollutant Baseline Growth 4 Cumulative

Annual Benzene 0.003 0.032 0.033 24-hour Toluene 0.11 0.08 0.15 1-hour Ethylbenzene 0.11 3.90 3.96 1-hour

Xylene 2.09 5.38 6.76

24-hour 0.27 0.99 1.06

6.3.2.2 Predicted benzene concentrations

Ambient concentrations of benzene are predicted from emissions from standing and working loses associated with the storage and handling of ULP, diesel and other chemicals.

Predicted annual average benzene concentrations are shown as isopleths in Figure 6-2 for Scenarios 1, 2 and 3. The predicted concentrations may be compared with the NAAQS of 5 μg/m3. For Scenario 1, the current tank and product configuration, the maximum predicted benzene concentration of 0.003 μg/m3 is significantly below the NAAQS and is attributed to the low benzene content of the products currently stored and handled. The maximum predicted concentration for Scenario 2 in isolation of other sources is 0.032 μg/m3 as a result of the introduction of benzene containing ULP and diesel in the Growth tank configuration. The maximum predicted concentration in Scenario 3, the cumulative impact, therefor increase marginally from the current baseline to 0.033 μg/m3. Despite the introduction of ULP and diesel the predicted benzene concentrations resulting from Scenario 2 and Scenario 3 remain significantly below the NAAQS. The predicted maximums occur on the Vopak site and the dispersion of benzene to the southwest and northeast by the prevailing winds along the coast is evident in the isopleth plots.

31


Figure 6-2: Predicted annual average benzene 3) resulting from emissions from Vopak for Scenario 1 (left), Scenario 2

(middle and Scenario 3 (right)

32


6.3.2.3 Predicted toluene concentrations

Ambient concentrations of toluene are predicted from emissions from standing and working loses from the storage and handling of ULP, diesel and other chemicals.

Predicted annual average toluene concentrations are shown as isopleths in Figure 6-3 for Scenarios 1, 2 and 3. The predicted concentrations may be compared with the WHO odour annoyance threshold concentration of 1 000 μg/m3 and the 24-hour ambient guideline value of 7 500 μg/m3 (Table 3-2). For Scenario 1, the current tank and product configuration, the maximum predicted 24-hour toluene concentration of 0.11 μg/m3 is significantly below the WHO guideline values and is attributed to the low toluene content of the products stored. The maximum predicted toluene concentration for Scenario 2 in isolation of other sources is 0.08 μg/m3, reflecting the relatively low toluene content in ULP and diesel. The maximum predicted toluene concentration increases marginally in Scenario 3, the cumulative impact, 0.15 μg/m3, when the emissions from the remaining tanks are added. Despite the introduction of ULP and diesel the predicted toluene concentration remains significantly below the WHO guideline value. The predicted maximums occur on the Vopak site and evident in the isopleth plots is the dispersion of toluene to the southwest and northeast by the prevailing winds along the coast.

6.3.2.4 Predicted ethyl benzene concentrations

Ambient concentrations of ethyl benzene are predicted from emissions from standing and working loses from the storage and handling of ULP and diesel.

Predicted 24-hour ethyl benzene concentrations are shown as isopleths in Figure 6-4 for Scenarios 1, 2 and 3. The predicted concentrations may be compared with the Government of Alberta odour threshold concentration of 10 000 μg/m3 and the 1-hour ambient guideline value of 2 000 μg/m3 (Table 3-2). For Scenario 1, the current tank and product configuration, the maximum predicted 24-hour ethyl benzene concentration of 0.11 μg/m3 is significantly below the Government of Alberta guideline values and is attributed to the low ethyl benzene content of the products stored.

33


The maximum predicted ethyl benzene concentration for Scenario 2 in isolation of other sources is 3.90 μg/m3, attributed to the low ethyl benzene content of ULP and diesel. The maximum predicted concentration increases in Scenario 3, the cumulative impact, to 3.96 μg/m3. Despite the introduction of ULP and diesel and the predicted increase in ethyl benzene concentrations, they are significantly below the Government of Alberta guideline values. The predicted maximums occur on the Vopak site and evident in the isopleth plots is the dispersion of ethyl benzene to the southwest and northeast by the prevailing winds along the coast.

6.3.2.5 Predicted xylene concentrations

Ambient concentrations of xylene are predicted from emissions from standing and working loses from the storage and handling of ULP, diesel and other chemicals.

Predicted maximum 1-hour and 24-hour xylene concentrations are shown as isopleths in Figure 6-5 and Figure 6-6 for Scenarios 1, 2 and 3. The predicted concentrations may be compared with the Government of the 1-hour ambient guideline value of 4 800 μg/m3 and their 24-hour guideline of 700 μg/m3 (Table 3-2). For Scenario 1, the current tank and product configuration, the maximum predicted 1-hour and 24-hour xylene concentrations of 2.09 μg/m3 and 0.27 μg/m3 respectively are significantly below the Government of Alberta guideline values and is attributed to the low xylene content of the products currently stored and handled. The maximum predicted 1-hour and 24-hour xylene concentrations for Scenario 2 in isolation of other sources is higher than the current situation at 5.38 μg/m3 and 0.99 μg/m3 respectively attributed to the xylene content of ULP and diesel. The maximum predicted 1-hour and 24-hour concentration increases in Scenario 3 from the base line to 6.76 μg/m3 and 1.06 respectively as a result of the introduction of ULP and diesel. Despite this the predicted increase in ambient xylene concentrations remain significantly below the Government of Alberta guideline values. The predicted maximums occur on the Vopak site and evident in the isopleth plots is the dispersion of xylene to the southwest and northeast by the prevailing winds along the coast.

34


Figure 6-3: Predicted 24-hour maximum toluene 3) resulting from emissions from Vopak for Scenario 1 (left), Scenario 2 (middle and Scenario 3 (right)

35


Figure 6-4: Predicted 1-hour maximum ethyl benzene 3) resulting from emissions from Vopak for Scenario 1 (left), Scenario 2 (middle and Scenario 3 (right)

36


Figure 6-5: Predicted 1-hour maximum xylene 3) resulting from emissions from Vopak for Scenario 1 (left), Scenario 2 (middle and Scenario 3 (right)

37


Figure 6-6: Predicted 24-hour maximum xylene 3) resulting from emissions from Vopak for Scenario 1 (left), Scenario 2 (middle and Scenario 3 (right)

38


6.3.3 Impact assessment The air quality impacts associated with dust and vehicle exhaust emissions during construction and decommissioning are assessed qualitatively. The impact assessment of the operational scenarios is based on the predicted ambient concentrations resulting from emission from the baseline (Scenario 1), the Growth 4 project in isolation (Scenario 2), and the cumulative situation (Scenario 3). The impact characteristics for each scenario are discussed in the following sections for BTEX individually. The impact scores are presented for each scenario in Tables 6-4 to 6-7. Construction and decommissioning (Table 6-4) Type: The impacts associated with construction and decommissioning activities are a direct consequence of emissions of pollutants into the atmosphere during these phases of the project. The impacts manifest as a nuisance with respect to dust and a risk of exposure through inhalation of the other pollutants. Extent: The impacts are predicted to be of local extent for all pollutants since they are released close to ground level with little or no buoyancy which limits their dispersion and the potential impacts to the site. Duration: The duration of the impact will be limited to the construction and decommissioning phase of the project, which is short-term. Scale: The scale of the impact is related to whether the predicted ambient concentrations of the pollutants exceed the limit values of the NAAQS in sensitive areas, i.e. residential or non-industrial areas. In the case of dust, SO2, NO2, PM10, CO and benzene the ambient concentrations are expected to be well below the respective NAAQS. The scale of the impact is therefore scored low with a value of 1. Frequency: The frequency of the impact is related to whether the predicted exceedances of the limit values exceed the permitted number of exceedances provided in the NAAQS, i.e. the tolerance. In the case of dust, SO2, NO2, PM10, CO and benzene, no exceedances of the NAAQS are expected and the frequency of the impact is scored low with a value of 1. Magnitude: Magnitude describes the intensity of the change in air quality that is predicted to occur. For dust, SO2, NO2, PM10, CO and benzene it is expected that ambient concentrations will be

39


low and are not likely to add to or significantly change the existing state of the environment. The magnitude of the change is predicted to be low with a score of 1. Significance: The significance of the impact combines the magnitude with the sensitivity of the environment. With a low magnitude expected for dust, SO2, NO2, PM10, CO and benzene concentrations resulting from emissions from the construction and decommissioning phase and with a low sensitivity, the significance is predicted to be minor or negligible. Scenario 1 (Current situation) (Table 6-5) Type: The predicted impacts associated with the handling and storage of chemical products at Vopak in Island View are a direct consequence of emissions from standing and working losses at the storage tanks. The impacts are negative as they manifest as ambient concentrations of the respective pollutants with a risk of exposure through inhalation. Extent: The impacts are predicted to be limited to the site and local for all pollutants. Duration: In all cases the duration of the impact will be for the operational life of the Vopak facility, i.e. long-term, enduring for as long as the facility is operational and emitting air pollutants. Scale: The scale of the impact is related to whether the predicted ambient concentrations of the pollutants exceed the limit values of the NAAQS and other recognised ambient air quality guidelines in sensitive areas, i.e. residential or non-industrial areas. In the case of benzene the predicted ambient concentrations are well below the respective NAAQS and for TEX the predicted concentrations are well below recognised ambient guidelines. The scale of the impact is therefore scored low with a value of 1. Frequency: The frequency of the impact is related to whether the predicted exceedances of the limit values exceed the permitted number of exceedances provided in the NAAQS or other guidelines. In the case of BTEX there are no predicted exceedances and the frequency of the impact is scored low with a value of 1. Magnitude: Magnitude describes the intensity of the change in air quality that is predicted to occur. For BTEX the predicted ambient concentrations are low and do not to significantly change the existing state. The magnitude is considered to be low. Significance:

40


The significance of the impact combines the magnitude with the sensitivity of the environment. With a low magnitude BTEX concentrations resulting from emissions from the Vopak, the significance is predicted to be minor. Scenario 2 (Growth 4 in isolation) (Table 6-6) Type: The predicted impacts associated with the handling and storage ULP and diesel at Vopak in Island View are a direct consequence of emissions from standing and working losses at the storage tanks. The impact is negative as it manifest as ambient concentrations of the respective pollutants with a risk of exposure through inhalation. Extent: The impacts are predicted to be limited to the site and local for all pollutants Duration: In all cases the duration of the impact will be for the operational life of the Vopak facility, i.e. long-term, enduring for as long as the facility is operational and emitting air pollutants. Scale: The scale of the impact is related to whether the predicted ambient concentrations of the pollutants exceed the limit values of the NAAQS and other recognised ambient air quality guidelines in sensitive areas, i.e. residential or non-industrial areas. For benzene the predicted ambient concentrations are well below the respective NAAQS and for TEX the predicted concentrations are well below recognised ambient guidelines. The scale of the impact is therefore scored low with a value of 1. Frequency: The frequency of the impact is related to whether the predicted exceedances of the limit values exceed the permitted number of exceedances provided in the NAAQS or other guidelines. In the case of BTEX there are no predicted exceedances and the frequency of the impact is scored low with a value of 1. Magnitude: Magnitude describes the intensity of the change in air quality that is predicted to occur. For BTEX the predicted ambient concentrations are low and do not to significantly change the existing state. The magnitude is considered to be low. Significance: The significance of the impact combines the magnitude with the sensitivity of the environment. With a low magnitude BTEX concentrations resulting from emissions from the Vopak, the significance is predicted to be minor. Scenario 3: (Growth 4 with the remaining tanks) (Table 6-7)

41


Type: The predicted impacts associated with the handling and storage of chemical products at Vopak in Island View are a direct consequence of emissions from standing and working losses at the storage tanks. The impacts are negative as they manifest as ambient concentrations of the respective pollutants with a risk of exposure through inhalation. Extent: The impacts are predicted to be limited to the Vopak site and local for all pollutants. Duration: In all cases the duration of the impact will be for the operational life of the Vopak facility, i.e. long-term, enduring for as long as the facility is operational and emitting air pollutants. Scale: The scale of the impact is related to whether the predicted ambient concentrations of the pollutants exceed the limit values of the NAAQS and other recognised ambient air quality guidelines in sensitive areas, i.e. residential or non-industrial areas. For benzene the predicted ambient concentrations are well below the respective NAAQS and for TEX the predicted concentrations are well below recognised ambient guidelines. The scale of the impact is therefore scored low with a value of 1. Frequency: The frequency of the impact is related to whether the predicted exceedances of the limit values exceed the permitted number of exceedances provided in the NAAQS or other guidelines. In the case of BTEX there are no predicted exceedances and the frequency of the impact is scored low with a value of 1. Magnitude: Magnitude describes the intensity of the change in air quality that is predicted to occur. For BTEX the predicted ambient concentrations are low and do not to significantly change the existing state. The magnitude is considered to be low. Significance: The significance of the impact combines the magnitude with the sensitivity of the environment. With a low magnitude BTEX concentrations resulting from emissions from the Vopak, the significance is predicted to be minor.

42


Table 6-4: Impact assessment for construction and decommissioning Pollutant Type Extent Duration Scale Frequency Magnitude Significance

SO2 Direct Local Short-term 1 1 Low Minor NOX Direct Local Short-term 1 1 Low Minor CO Direct Local Short-term 1 1 Low Minor Particulates Direct Local Short-term 1 1 Low Minor Benzene Direct Local Short-term 1 1 Low Minor

Table 6-5: Impact assessment for Scenario 1 (Current situation) Pollutant Type Extent Duration Scale Frequency Magnitude Significance

Benzene Direct Local Long-term 1 1 Low Minor TEX Direct Local Long-term 1 1 Low Minor

Table 6-6: Impact assessment for Scenario 2 (Growth 4 in isolation) Pollutant Type Extent Duration Scale Frequency Magnitude Significance


Table 6-7: Impact assessment for Scenario 3 (Growth 4 with the remaining tanks) Pollutant Type Extent Duration Scale Frequency Magnitude Significance


43


6.4 RECOMMENDED MITIGATION MEASURES

Mitigation to reduce emissions during construction and decommissioning focus on dust control while during normal operations the control of fugitive emissions is the focus.

6.4.1 Construction and decommissioning The main concern for the construction and decommissioning phases is the generation of dust and exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment on site. Control measures should consider

Covering loads on vehicles carrying dusty construction materials; and Limiting access to the construction site to construction vehicles only.

6.4.2 Operations The main source of emissions from storage tanks is working and standing losses. These are reduced through applying Best Available technologies (BAT) for storage tanks that depends on the vapour pressure of the product. For products with a vapour pressure less than 14 kPa, i.e. diesel, BAT is a fixed-roof tank that is vented to atmosphere. For more volatile products with a vapour pressure of more than 14 kPa, i.e. ULP, BAT is an external floating-roof tank with primary rim seal and secondary rim seal for tank with a diameter greater than 20m, or a fixed-roof tank with internal floating deck fitted with a primary seal, or a fixed-roof tank with vapour recovery system.

6.5 RESIDUAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT CONCLUSIONS Impacts on ambient air quality are associated with emissions from Vopak while it is in operation. The impacts will cease if operations stop. In other words, there will be no residual impacts on air quality.

7 MANAGEMENT & MONITORING

7.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

7.1.1 Construction and decommissioning The main concern for the construction and decommissioning phases is the generation of dust and exhaust emissions from vehicles and equipment on site. Mitigation and management of these is to implement rules on site to minimise dust and exhaust emissions. The following mitigation measures are proposed:

44


Loads on vehicles carrying dusty construction materials should be covered; and Limit access to construction site to construction vehicles only.

7.1.2 Operations The main concern for the operational phases at Vopak are the potential to increase ambient concentrations of BTEX. The predicted ambient concentrations are low and significantly below the respective NAAQS and other ambient guidelines as a result of the storage tank control mechanisms to limit vapour loss. As a result mitigation and management measures are aimed at ensuring optimum performance of the various control mechanisms. The following is proposed:

The development and implementation of servicing programs for the Growth 4 tanks; Stocking of critical components to ensure the availability of spares in the event of mechanical faults.

8 MANAGEMENT & MONITORING

8.1 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT REQUIREMENTS

Mitigation measures for incorporation into the EMP are suggested with respect to construction and decommissioning activities to limit nuisance impacts (Table 8-1). Although the predicted impacts from operations are low, it is important that the facility is maintained to ensure performance continually meets the design specifications. It is recommended that Vopak’s current ambient air quality monitoring program is expanded to include BTEX monitoring on the fenceline of the facility. In addition, it is recommended that that the current Leak Detection and Repair program is revised to include the new Growth 4 tanks.

8.2 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

An Environmental Management System consists of an emissions inventory, monitoring system and reporting. Requirements for environmental management will be dictated by the conditions in the Atmospheric Emission License (AEL). These are likely to include:

i. Annual emission inventory update; ii. Annual LDAR and reporting;

iii. Fenceline monitoring of BTEX; iv. Annual reporting of emissions to the National Atmospheric Emission Inventory

System (NAEIS) (Government Gazette 38633, Notice No. R 283 of 2 April 2015);

45


v. Registration on the South African Atmospheric Emission and Licensing Portal (SAAELIP) and annual reporting to the Licensing Officer in terms of the AEL.

9 IMPACT SUMMARY

Table 9-1 and 9-2 provide a summary of impacts addressed in this study, before mitigation and with mitigation.

Table 9-1: Construction and decommissioning Impact Assessment Outcomes Project Activities/Impacts Significance of Impacts Construction/Decommissioning Phase Before

Mitigation With

Mitigation Increase in ambient concentrations of dust

and construction vehicle and construction equipment exhaust emissions such as SO2, NO2, PM10, CO and benzene in the environment.

Minor Minor

Table 9-2: Operational Phase: Growth 4 with remaining tanks Project Activities/Impacts Significance of Impacts Operational Phase Before

Mitigation With

Mitigation Increase in ambient concentrations of BTEX

from the introduction of ULP and diesel tanks

Minor Minor

10 CONCLUSION AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Air quality impacts are assessed for the operation of Vopak’s Growth 4 project at Island View involving the replacement of a number of smaller storage tanks containing different chemicals with 6 large and 6 smaller tanks containing ULP and diesel. Dispersion modelling is used to predict the ambient concentrations of BTEX and ethyl or the current operational scenario, the new tanks in isolation and cumulatively for the final configuration. The assessment of ambient air quality impacts compares the predicted concentrations of the pollutants with the NAAQS for benzene and other ambient guidelines for toluene, ethyl benzene and xylene. The impact assessment considers sensitivity of the receiving environment and defines the significance of the impacts according to their type, extent, duration, scale, frequency and magnitude.

46


The proposed storage tanks will be equipped with technology to minimise the evaporative working and standing losses. As a result the predicted emissions of BTEX are low and the predicted ambient concentrations are well below the respective NAAQS when ULP and diesel are introduced to the site. The significance of the air quality impacts for the Growth 4 tanks alone is minor. Similarly, the significance of the cumulative impacts for the new tank configuration and products of the completed Growth 4 Project is minor.

Employing the generic design parameters provided for the project, it is predicted that the site operations will generate low emissions, low ambient concentrations will result, and minor reversible impacts are predicted. Mitigation and management measures are recommended for construction, operations and decommissioning to control the emission of dust and construction vehicle exhausts. BAT is recommended for the Growth 4 storage tanks to limit evaporative losses from ULP and diesel and reduce the potential for BTEX emissions. It is the reasonable opinion of the authors that the project should be authorised considering the outcomes of this impact assessment.

11 REFERENCES

DEA, (2009): National Ambient Air Quality Standards, Government Gazette, 32861, Vol. 1210, 24 December 2009.

DEA, (2010): Listed Activities and Associated Minimum Emission Standards identified in terms of Section 21 of the Air Quality Act, Act No. 39 of 2004, Notice 248, Government Gazette, 35894, 31 March 2010

DEA, (2012): National Ambient Air Quality Standard for Particulate Matter with Aerodynamic Diameter less than 2.5 micron meters, Notice 486 of 2012, Government Gazette, 35463.

DEA, (2013a): Listed Activities and Associated Minimum Emission Standards identified in terms of Section 21 of the Air Quality Act, Act No. 39 of 2004, Notice 893, Government Gazette, 37054, 22 November 2013

DEA, (2013b): Regulations prescribing the format of the Atmospheric Impact Report, Notice 747, Government Gazette, 36904, 11 October 2013

DEA, (2013c): National Dust Control Regulations in terms of the National Environmental of the Air Quality Act, Act No. 39 of 2004, Notice 827 of 2013, Government Gazette, 36974.

DEA, (2014): Regulations regarding air dispersion modelling, Notice 533, Government Gazette, 37804, 11 July 2014.

DEA, (2016): Regulation prescribing the Atmospheric Emission Licensing processing fee, Notice 250, Government Gazette, 39805, 11 March 2016.

South African Weather Bureau (SAWB), (1998): Climate of South Africa, Climate Statistics up to 1990. Climate of South Africa, Climate Statistics up to 1990, WB40.

47


APPENDIX 1: MODEL PLAN OF STUDY REPORT

48

AIR QUALITY SPECIALIST STUDY: VOPAK GROWTH 4 PROJECT OWOWOWWWWWWOWOWWWWWW

UMN

Vopak

13 July 2016

Dispersion Modelling Plan of Study Report in Support of for the Vopak Growth 4 project

0


Report details: Client: Vopak Report title: Report number:

uMN003-07 uMN085-17

Project: Vopak Growth 4 Project uMN045-16

Version: Final

This report has been produced for Vopak by uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd. The intellectual property contained in this report remains vested in uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd. No part of the report may be reproduced in any manner without written permission from uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd and Vopak Terminals. When used in a reference this document should be cited as follows: uMoya-NILU (2015): Dispersion Modelling Plan of Study Report in Support of for the Vopak Growth 4 project, uMN085-17, Final, July 2016.

Author details: Authors: Sarisha Perumal, Mark Zunckel and Atham Raghunandan Approved: Mark Zunckel

i


TABLE OF CONTENTS TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................................ ii LIST OF FIGURES ...................................................................................................................................... ii 1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................ 3

1.1 Background .............................................................................................................................. 3 1.2 Project Location ........................................................................................................................ 3 1.3 Land use determination in the modelling domain ............................................................. 4 1.4 Elevation data (DEM) and resolution ................................................................................... 5

2 EMISSIONS CHARACTERISATION ............................................................................................... 5 2.1 Background concentrations .................................................................................................... 7

3 METEOROLOGICAL DATA ............................................................................................................. 7 4 MODELLING PROCEDURES ........................................................................................................... 8

4.1 Proposed Model ....................................................................................................................... 8 4.2 Grid receptors .......................................................................................................................... 8 4.3 Emission included in modelling for each scenario ............................................................. 9 4.4 Model settings .......................................................................................................................... 9 4.5 Model accuracy ...................................................................................................................... 10

REFERENCES ........................................................................................................................................... 11 LIST OF FIGURES Figure 2-1: Area sources as defined in CALPUFF ................................................................................ 6 Figure 4-1: Relative location of the modelling domain that will be used for the CALMET and CALPUFF model runs ............................................................................................................................... 9 LIST OF TABLES Table 1-1: Land types, use and structures and vegetation cover ........................................................ 5 Table 2-1: Emission rates for area sources (in tons/annum/m2) ........................................................ 6 Table 4-1: Parameterisation of key variables for CALMET ................................................................ 10 Table 4-2: Parameterisation of key variables for CALPUFF .............................................................. 10

ii


1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 Background

Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) LTD, is proposing certain upgrading activities at its Farewell and King sites in the Durban Harbour, within the Island View Petrochemical Complex. The project aims to expand and enhance Vopak's infrastructure to facilitate the supply of South Africa’s increasing demand for petroleum products and thus improve the security of fuel supply and facilitate the import of cleaner fuels to South Africa. The Growth 4 project will upgrade tanks and associated infrastructure within existing bunds at the Farewell site where 38 tanks currently make up a total capacity of 32 000 m3. These will be upgraded to 6 tanks of 20 000 m3 and 6 tanks of 5000 m3 each. The total capacity of the planned expansion is 150 000 m3. Environmental Resources Management Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd (ERM) has been appointed by Vopak Terminal Growth 4 Project, Durban, to undertake the Basic Assessment (BA). In turn, ERM has sub-contracted uMoya-NILU Consulting (Pty) Ltd to undertake the specialist air quality impact assessment for the BA. The focus of this report is the dispersion modelling approach adopted for the study, according to the requirements of the DEA regulations, documented in the Guideline for Air Dispersion Modelling for Air Quality Management in South Africa (DEA, 2014).

1.2 Project Location

The Vopak Growth 4 project is to be developed on a brown field site currently operated by Vopak within the Island View Complex at the Port of Durban (Figure 1-1). The site is located within an area identified for industrial development.

3


Figure 1-1: Location of site

1.3 Land use determination in the modelling domain

The Guideline for Air Dispersion Modelling for Air Quality Management in South Africa (DEA, 2014) recommends the Land Use Procedure as sufficient for determining the urban/rural status of a modelling domain. The classification of the study area as urban or rural is based on the Auer method specified in the US EPA guideline on air dispersion models (US EPA, 2005). From the Auer’s method, areas typically defined as rural include residences with grass lawns and trees, large estates, metropolitan parks and golf courses, agricultural areas, undeveloped land and water surfaces. An area is defined as urban if it has less than 35% vegetation coverage or the area falls into one of the use types in Table 1-1. An area is defined as urban if it has less than 35% vegetation coverage or the area falls into one of the use types in Table 1-1. The land use type I1 and I2 account for more than 50% of the area within a 3 km radius of the respective Ports. The region surrounding the study area is therefore classified as urban.

4


Table 1-1: Land types, use and structures and vegetation cover Urban Land Use

Type Use and Structures Vegetation I1 Heavy industrial Less than 5 % I2 Light/moderate industrial Less than 5 % C1 Commercial Less than 15 % R2 Dense single / multi-family Less than 30 % R3 Multi-family, two-story Less than 35 %

1.4 Elevation data (DEM) and resolution

The land use data is based on the Global Land Cover Characterisation (GLCC) Version 2 dataset, which has a horizontal grid spacing of 30 arc seconds (~1 km resolution). The digital terrain data is based on the Shuttle Radar Topography Mission (SRTM) 3 Global Coverage Version 2 dataset. It was collected during the Shuttle Radar Topography Mission and has a grid spacing of 3 arc-second (~90 m resolution).

2 EMISSIONS CHARACTERISATION

The emissions inventory process for the Air Quality Study is described in detail in the Atmospheric Impact Report (uMoya-NILU, 2016). The following key pollutants are associated with the Vopal Growth 4 project viz. benzene, toluene, ethylbenzene, and xylene. These pollutants are classified as toxic or hazardous air pollutants by the USEPA. Toxic air pollutants are pollutants that cause or may cause cancer or other serious health effects. However, their effects normally occur at high concentrations or concentrations not commonly found in the ambient environment. The impacts of toxic air pollutants are generally occupational in nature, that is, at the point of storage. The standards developed for toxic air pollutants are primarily occupational in nature and are applied to workers working in facilities that produce or store these polluting compounds. There are various types of toxic air pollutants that originate from chemical and petrochemical storage facilities such as Vopak. They are primarily organic in nature (collectively referred to as total organic compounds or TOCs) and formed by the volatilization of organic compounds. Of the toxic air pollutants listed above, only benzene has been assigned with a South African ambient air quality standard. The standard for benzene, which is based on an annual average, consists of a limit value of 5 μg/m3. No point sources are assessed as part of the proposed development, and therefore no point source characteristics are included. Area sources are described in Figure 2-1, and emission rates provided in Table 2-1. Emissions are estimated for the future tank capacity at the site for total organic compounds, as well as the BTEX group of organic compounds. These are generated through

5


standing and working losses from the tanks. Tank technology plays a significant role in mitigating emissions.

Figure 2-1: Area sources as defined in CALPUFF

Table 2-1: Emission rates for area sources (in tons/annum/m2) Bund (as per Google Earth Diagram) Benzene Toluene Ethyl Benzene Xylene

SCENARIO 1: Baseline

Area Source 1 5.54E-08 6.47E-07 8.98E-08 1.68E-06 Area Source 2 0 0 0 0 Area Source 3 0 0 0 0 Area Source 4 0 0 0 0 Area Source 5 6.22E-07 7.31E-06 1.02E-06 1.89E-05 Area Source 6 5.87E-08 6.83E-07 9.43E-08 1.77E-06 Area Source 7 1.83E-07 2.15E-06 2.99E-07 5.56E-06 Area Source 8 7.33E-06 8.64E-06 6.32E-07 2.87E-06

SCENARIO 2: Future

Area Source 1 8.44E-06 2.03E-06 1.81E-05 2.5E-05 SCENARIO 3: Cumulative

Area Source 1 8.444E-06 2.03E-06 1.81E-05 2.5E-05 Area Source 2 0 0 0 0 Area Source 3 0 0 0 0 Area Source 4 0 0 0 0 Area Source 5 6.22E-07 7.31E-06 1.02E-06 1.89E-05 Area Source 6 5.87E-08 6.83E-07 9.43E-08 1.77E-06

6


Area Source 7 1.83E-07 2.15E-06 2.99E-07 5.56E-06 Area Source 8 7.33E-06 8.64E-06 6.32E-07 2.87E-06

2.1 Background concentrations

A background concentration is the portion of the ambient concentration of a pollutant due to sources, both natural and anthropogenic, other than the source being assessed. Sources of SO2, NO2, PM10, C6H6 and CO beyond the boundaries of the respective Ports are not included in the emission inventories. They are therefore not included in the dispersion modelling.

3 METEOROLOGICAL DATA

The South African Weather Service (SAWS) is the main source of reliable observed surface meteorological data in South Africa as it has been collected in accordance with the requirements established by the World Meteorological Organisation (WMO). While there is a good network of SAWS observation stations across the country, the coverage is not always adequate to meet the requirements for robust dispersion modelling. To address the challenges relating to data scarcity in the area of interest, The Air Pollution Model (TAPM) meteorological data will be used to supplement the meteorology in each of the modelling domains. Mesoscale models such as TAPM use gridded meteorological data and sophisticated physics algorithms to produce meteorological fields at defined horizontal grid resolutions and in multiple vertical levels over a large domain. They therefore offer an alternative to meteorological measurements as input for advanced dispersion models. Providing actual surface observations to mesoscale meteorological model simulations produce more accurate meteorological fields as the actual observations are used to “nudge” the model in its solutions. TAPM will be used to model spatially and temporally continuous surface meteorological fields for each modelling domain. TAPM is set-up in a nested configuration of three domains at each Port. The outer domain is 480 km by 480 km at a 24 km grid resolution, the middle domain is 240 km by 240 km at a 12 km grid resolution and the inner domain is 60 km by 60 km at a 3 km grid resolution, corresponding with the CALPUFF domain. The nesting configuration ensures that topographical effects on meteorology are captured and that the modelled meteorology is well resolved and characterised across the boundaries of the inner domain, i.e. the CALPUFF dispersion modelling domain. The respective dispersion modelling domains will be centered on the site of interest. Three years (2012, 2013 and 2014) of hourly observed meteorological data from SAWS meteorological stations in the vicinity of the respective site will be input to TAPM to ‘nudge’ the modelled meteorology towards the observations and to create a continuous meteorological input file for each domain.

7


The model outputs include hourly wind speed and direction, temperature, relative humidity, total solar radiation, net radiation, sensible heat flux, evaporative heat flux, convective velocity scale, precipitation, mixing height, friction velocity and Obukhov length. The subset of the entire TAPM model output in the form of pre-processed gridded surface meteorological data fields will be input into CALMET. This approach eliminates potential issues associated with missing observational data. Upper air data is included in the pre-processed TAPM meteorological fields. The upper air data is spatially and temporally continuous, and includes data at 27 vertical levels between 10 m to 5 km above ground level. There are more levels close to the surface and decreasing with increasing altitude up to the last level.

4 MODELLING PROCEDURES

4.1 Proposed Model

A Level 3 air quality assessment is conducted in situations where the purpose of the assessment requires a detailed understanding of the air quality impacts (time and space variation of the concentrations) and when it is important to account for causality effects, calms, non-linear plume trajectories, spatial variations in turbulent mixing, multiple source types and chemical transformations (DEA, 2014). A Level 3 assessment may be used to assess contaminants in meteorologically complex situations such as mountain valley flows, reversals, sea breeze, and fumigation. A level 3 assessment is clearly necessary for the Air Quality Study. The DEA recommend the US-EPA approved CALPUFF dispersion model (http://www.src.com/calpuff/calpuff1.htm) for Level 3 assessments (DEA, 2014). CALPUFF is a multi-layer, multi-species non-steady-state puff dispersion model that simulates the effects of time- and space-varying meteorological conditions on pollution transport, transformation and removal. CALPUFF can be applied on scales of tens to hundreds of kilometres. It includes algorithms for sub-grid scale effects (such as terrain impingement), as well as longer range effects (such as pollutant removal due to wet scavenging and dry deposition, chemical transformation, and visibility effects of particulate matter concentrations).

4.2 Grid receptors

The CALPUFF modelling domain of 3 600 km2 is 60 km (west-east) by 60 km (north-south) and will be centred on the respective site. It will consist of a uniformly spaced receptor grid with 0.5 km spacing, giving 14 400 grid cells (120 x 120 grid cells).

8


Figure 4-1: Relative location of the modelling domain that will be used for the CALMET and CALPUFF model runs

4.3 Emission included in modelling for each scenario Three scenarios are assessed. Scenario 1 is for the current baseline, scenario 2 for the future tank installation, and scenario 3 addresses cumulative sources from all tanks at the site.

4.4 Model settings The parameterisation of key variables that will apply in CALMET and CALPUFF are indicated in Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 respectively.

9


Table 4-1: Parameterisation of key variables for CALMET Parameter Model value

12 vertical cell face heights (m) 0, 20, 40, 80, 160, 320, 640, 1000, 1500, 2000, 2500,

3000, 4000 Coriolis parameter (per second) 0.0001 Empirical constants for mixing height equation

Neutral, mechanical: 1.41 Convective: 0.15

Stable: 2400 Overwater, mechanical: 0.12

Minimum potential temperature lapse rate (K/m)

0.001

Depth of layer above convective mixing height through which lapse rate is computed (m)

200

Wind field model Diagnostic wind module Surface wind extrapolation Similarity theory Restrictions on extrapolation of surface data

No extrapolation as modelled upper air data field is applied

Radius of influence of terrain features (km)

5

Radius of influence of surface stations (km)

Not used as continuous surface data field is applied

Table 4-2: Parameterisation of key variables for CALPUFF Parameter Model value

Chemical transformation Default NO2 conversion factor is applied

Wind speed profile Urban Calm conditions Wind speed < 0.5 m/s Plume rise Transitional plume rise, stack tip downwash, and

partial plume penetration is modelled Dispersion CALPUFF used in PUFF mode Dispersion option Pasquill-Gifford coefficients are used for rural and

McElroy-Pooler coefficients are used for urban Terrain adjustment method Partial plume path adjustment

4.5 Model accuracy

Air quality models attempt to predict ambient concentrations based on “known” or measured parameters, such as wind speed, temperature profiles, solar radiation and emissions. There are however, variations in the parameters that are not measured, the so-called “unknown” parameters as well as unresolved details of atmospheric turbulent flow. Variations in these “unknown”

10


parameters can result in deviations of the predicted concentrations of the same event, even though the “known” parameters are fixed. There are also “reducible” uncertainties that result from inaccuracies in the model, errors in input values and errors in the measured concentrations. These might include poor quality or unrepresentative meteorological, geophysical and source emission data, errors in the measured concentrations that are used to compare with model predictions and inadequate model physics and formulation used to predict the concentrations. “Reducible” uncertainties can be controlled or minimised. This is done by using accurate input data, preparing the input files correctly, checking and re-checking for errors, correcting for odd model behaviour, ensuring that the errors in the measured data are minimised and applying appropriate model physics. Models recommended in the DEA dispersion modelling guideline (DEA, 2014) have been evaluated using a range of modelling test kits (http://www.epa.gov./scram001). CALPUFF is one of the models that have been evaluated and it is therefore not mandatory to perform any modelling evaluations. Rather the accuracy of the modelling in this assessment is enhanced by every effort to minimise the “reducible” uncertainties in input data and model parameterisation. REFERENCES DEA, (2014): Regulations regarding air dispersion modelling, Notice 533, Government Gazette,

37804, 11 July 2014. US EPA, (2005): Revision to the Guideline on Air Quality Models: Adoption of a Preferred General

Purpose (Flat and Complex Terrain) Dispersion Model and Other Revisions; Final Rule. US EPA.

11

Annex D2

Noise Impact Assessments

P.O. Box 2047, Garsfontein East, 0060 Tel: 012 – 004 0362, Fax: 086 – 621 0292, E-mail: [email protected]

Study done for:

Prepared by:

ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd

NOISE STUDY FOR ENVIRONMENTAL IMPACT ASSESSMENT

Vopak Growth 4 Project, near Durban Kwa-Zulu Natal

ENVIRO-ACOUSTIC RESEARCH ENVIRONMENTAL NOISE IMPACT ASSESSMENT – VOPAK

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY

INTRODUCTION

Enviro-Acoustic Research cc (EARES) was commissioned by ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd (also referred to as ERM) to determine the potential noise impact on the surrounding environment due to the Growth 4 project. Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) Ltd (the developer) proposes certain expansion activities at its Farewell and King sites in the Port of Durban, Kwa-Zulu Natal. The Vopak Efficiency (Growth 4) Project will include the expansion of the Farewell / King Sites to increase the storage capacity of petroleum products i.e. diesel, ULP, base oils and chemicals. This will involve:

Demolition of 38 Above ground Storage Tanks (AST’s) with a total storage capacity of 32 000m3 and associated infrastructure including:

drumming shed; two gantries; three pump stations; and hose exchanges located in bund 2A and bund 1A;

Construction of six new tanks with a storage capacity of 20 000m3 each (total storage capacity of 120 000m3) for the storage of clean petroleum products (worst-case assessed as diesel and ULP); Construction and commissioning of six new tanks with a storage capacity of 5 000m3 each for Classic Performance Products (CPP)/chemicals (caustic and MEG)/base oils (total storage capacity of 30 000m3); Construction of associated infrastructure including:

A 16 inch berth line for CPP from Farewell / King Site to berth 2; Two 16 inch berth lines for CPP from Farewell / King Site to berth to berth 9 with associated infrastructure; A new pump bay with the following: o Two backload pump for fuels (1400m3/hr max); o Three backload/road loading pumps for base oils/chemicals (300m3/hr max); o Four truck loading pumps for fuels (250m3/hr each); o Four 10 inch pipelines from Farewell to Blend plant for truck loading; o A new manifold, connected to Fuel 2 manifold, Fuel 2,5 tanks and NMPP; and

Upgrade of: The road loading gantry at Farewell for Base oil/Chemicals; Fuel 2 substation or new substation; Connection of 16 inch berth lines to Berth 6 manifold; Overall Operation and Automation philosophy in line with Fuel 2 and Fuel 3; Investigate options to connect to site rail sidings; Upgrade building facilities (ablution and offices) on Farewell Site; and Investigate options to upgrade/ relocate the current effluent treatment plant.

ii


All pipelines will be constructed above ground and along existing racks. No pipelines will be abandoned (decommissioned). Vopak will also be installing inner floating roofs and vapour recovery technology on all new tanks containing volatile products. In 2013, an Environmental Noise Impact Assessment (ENIA) was conducted for an alternative layout and operation. Subsequently, a new layout is proposed, with EARES been contracted to conducted a desktop study on an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) scale to determine the potential for a noise impact at receptors. This report describes the Noise Rating Levels and potential noise impact that the upgrade may have on the surrounding receptors sound environment, highlighting the methods used, potential issues identified, findings and recommendations. The Terms of Reference (ToR) for this study as per the guidelines and regulations of SANS 10103:2008, 10328:2008, Appendix 6 of GN R 982 of 2014 (as listed in Section 2.3.1 of this report) and GN R154 of 1992 (Noise Control Regulations) in terms of Section 25 of the Environmental Conservation Act, 1989.

BASELINE

Receptors: Two receptors in the study area were numbered as NSD01 and NSD02 (see report Figure 1-2) and represent the closest dwellings in the Fynnlands community in relation to the project footprint. Measurements: Ambient (background) noise levels were measured previously by a specialist during 2013. No baseline measurements were conducted by EARES and the onsite noise measurements obtained during 2013 was used for this assessment. Acceptable rating levels considering available information: Based on the onsite measurement findings of available studies the following Rating Levels for receptors NSD01- NSD02 were used:

Busy urban district - daytime rating of LReq,d of 60 dBA; and Busy urban district - night-time rating LReq,n of 50 dBA.

iii


FINDINGS

Two scenarios are applicable, namely the construction and the operations of the facility. A day and night-time operational period (06:00 – 22:00 and 22:00 – 06:00 respectively) was assessed, with the most relevant period when a quiet time is sought (night-time). Only a daytime construction scenario was considered as per the project scope. The resulting future noise projections indicate that the construction and operation of the project will comply with the Noise Control Regulations (GN R154), SANS 10103:2008 guideline and IFC performance standards. The demolition phase would have a lower noise impact than the construction phase and was not further investigated due to the low construction phase impact. MANAGEMENT & MITIGATION OF NOISE IMPACT Based on the project outcome of the modelled scenarios, mitigation options are not required, however recommendations are still supplied for the developer to consider to ensure a negligible significance (refer to mitigation section within document). No measurement programme is recommended. RECOMMENDATIONS It is therefore recommended that the project be authorised from a noise impact perspective.

iv


NoiseMorné de JagerPO Box 2047, Garsfontein East0060 Cell:

Fax:082 565 4059

012 004 0362 086 621 [email protected], SAAI

Environmental Resources Management (Pty) LtdStephanie GopaulSuite S005, 17 The Boulevard, Westway Office Park, Westville3635 Cell:

Fax:+2783 778 4904

+27 31 265 0033 +27 31 265 0150 [email protected]

DETAILS OF SPECIALIST AND DECLARATION OF INTEREST

File Reference Number: NEAS Reference Number: Date Received:

(For official use only)

DEA/EIA

Application for authorisation in terms of the National Environmental Management Act, 1998 (Act No. 107 of 1998), as amended and the Environmental Impact Assessment Regulations, 2010

PROJECT TITLE

VOPAK Efficiency (Growth 4) Project

Specialist:Contact person: Postal address: Postal code: Telephone:E-mail:Professional affiliation(s) (if any)

Project Consultant:Contact person: Postal address: Postal code: Telephone:E-mail:

v


The specialist appointed in terms of the Regulations

I, Morné de Jager, declare that –

General declaration

I act as the independent specialist in this applicationI will perform the work relating to the application in an objective manner, even if this results in views and findings that are not favourable to the applicantI declare that there are no circumstances that may compromise my objectivity in performing such work;I have expertise in conducting the specialist report relevant to this application, including knowledge of the Act, regulations and any guidelines that have relevance to the proposed activity;I will comply with the Act, regulations and all other applicable legislation;I have no, and will not engage in, conflicting interests in the undertaking of the activity;I undertake to disclose to the applicant and the competent authority all material information in my possession that reasonably has or may have the potential of influencing - any decision to be taken with respect to the application by the competent authority; and - the objectivity of any report, plan or document to be prepared by myself for submission to the competent authority;all the particulars furnished by me in this form are true and correct; andI realise that a false declaration is an offence in terms of Regulation 71 and is punishable in terms of section 24F of the Act.

Signature of the specialist:

Enviro-Acoustic Research ccName of company (if applicable):

1st July 2016Date:

vi


CONTENTS OF THE SPECIALIST REPORT – CHECKLIST Contents of this report in terms of Regulation GNR 982 of 2014, Appendix

6 Cross-reference in this report

(a) details of— the specialist who prepared the report; and the expertise of that specialist to compile a specialist report including a curriculum vitae;

Section 12

(b) a declaration that the specialist is independent in a form as may be specified by the competent authority;

See above

(c) an indication of the scope of, and the purpose for which, the report was prepared;

Section 1.1

(d) the date and season of the site investigation and the relevance of the season to the outcome of the assessment;

Section

(e) a description of the methodology adopted in preparing the report or carrying out the specialised process;

Section 1.5

(f) the specific identified sensitivity of the site related to the activity and its associated structures and infrastructure;

Section 1.3.5 & Section 4

(g) an identification of any areas to be avoided, including buffers; Section 1.3.5 & Section 9 (h) a map superimposing the activity including the associated structures and infrastructure on the environmental sensitivities of the site including areas to be avoided, including buffers;

Section 9 & Figure 8-1

(i) a description of any assumptions made and any uncertainties or gaps in knowledge;

Section 7

(j) a description of the findings and potential implications of such findings on the impact of the proposed activity, including identified alternatives on the environment;

Section 9

(k) any mitigation measures for inclusion in the EMPr; Section 10 (l) any conditions for inclusion in the environmental authorisation; Section 10 (m) any monitoring requirements for inclusion in the EMPr or environmental authorisation;

None

(n) a reasoned opinion— i. as to whether the proposed activity or portions thereof should be authorised; and ii. if the opinion is that the proposed activity or portions thereof should be authorised, any avoidance, management and mitigation measures that should be included in the EMPr, and where applicable, the closure plan;

i. Section 11 ii. Section 11

(o) a summary and copies of any comments received during any consultation process and where applicable all responses thereto; and

None received, Section 1.4

(p) any other information requested by the competent authority Nothing requested

vii


Report should be sited as: De Jager, M. (2016). “Vopak Growth 4 Project, near Durban Kwa-Zulu Natal”, Enviro-Acoustic Research cc, Pretoria Client: ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd

Suite S005 The Boulevard

Westway Office Park Westville Durban

Report no: ERM/ENIA/201606-Rev 1 Authors: M. de Jager (B. Ing (Chem)) Review: Shaun Weinberg (B.Sc. Applied Mathematics in Physics Stream – in process) Date: June 2016

COPYRIGHT WARNING

This information is privileged and confidential in nature and unauthorized dissemination or copying is prohibited. This information will be updated as required Eurasian Natural Resources Corporation plc claims protection of this information in terms of the Promotion of Access to Information Act, (No 2 of 2002) and without limiting this claim, especially the protection

afforded by Chapter 4.

The document is the property of Enviro-Acoustic Research CC. The content, including format, manner of presentation, ideas, technical procedure, technique and any attached appendices are subject to copyright in terms of the Copyright Act 98 of 1978 (as amended by the respective Copyright Amendment Acts No. 56 of 1980, No. 66 of 1983, No. 52 of 1984, No. 39 of 1986, No. 13 of 1988, No. 61 of 1989, No. 125 of 1992, Intellectual Property Laws Amendment Act, No. 38 of 1997 and, No. 9 of 2002) in terms of

section 6 of the aforesaid Act, and may only be reproduced as part of the Environmental Impact Assessment process by ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd

viii


TABLE OF CONTENTS

page

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY .......................................................................................................... ii

INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................... ii

BASELINE .................................................................................................................................... iii

FINDINGS ................................................................................................................................... iv

CONTENTS OF THE SPECIALIST REPORT – CHECKLIST ......................................... vii

TABLE OF CONTENTS ............................................................................................................ ix

LIST OF TABLES ........................................................................................................................ xi

LIST OF FIGURES ..................................................................................................................... xi

APPENDICES .............................................................................................................................. xi

GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS ...................................................................................... xii

1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................. 1 1.1 Introduction and Purpose ......................................................................................................... 1 1.2 Brief Project Description ............................................................................................................ 1

1.2.1 Project Overview .................................................................................................................... 1 1.3 Study area .................................................................................................................................... 2

1.3.1 Topography ............................................................................................................................. 2 1.3.2 Surrounding Land Use ........................................................................................................... 2 1.3.3 Roads and Railway lines ......................................................................................................... 3 1.3.4 Ground conditions and vegetation ......................................................................................... 3 1.3.5 Potential Sensitive Receptors ................................................................................................. 3

1.4 Available Information................................................................................................................ 6 1.5 Terms of Reference ..................................................................................................................... 6

2 LEGAL CONTEXT, POLICIES AND GUIDELINES ...................................................... 8 2.1 The Republic of South Africa Constitution Act (“the Constitution”) ................................. 8 2.2 The Environment Conservation Act (Act 73 of 1989) ............................................................ 8

2.2.1 National Noise Control Regulations (GN R154 of 1992) ...................................................... 8 2.3 The National Environmental Management Act (Act 107 of 1998) .................................... 10

2.3.1 Appendix 6 of GN R 982 of 2014 ......................................................................................... 10 2.4 National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act (“AQA” – Act 39 of 2004) ....... 11

2.4.1 Model Air Quality Management By-law for adoption and adaptation by municipalities (GN 579 of 2010) .......................................................................................... 12

2.5 Noise Standards ........................................................................................................................ 12 2.6 International Guidelines .......................................................................................................... 13

2.6.1 Guidelines for Community Noise (WHO, 1999) ................................................................. 13 2.6.2 Night Noise Guidelines for Europe (WHO, 2009) ............................................................... 13 2.6.3 Equator Principles ................................................................................................................ 14 2.6.4 IFC: General EHS Guidelines – Environmental Noise Management .................................. 14 2.6.5 Environmental Management Systems ................................. Error! Bookmark not defined.

ix


2.6.6 European Parliament Directive 200/14/EC ......................................................................... 16

3 CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL SOUND CHARACTER .......................................... 17

4 INVESTIGATION OF EXISTING AND FUTURE NOISE SOURCES .................... 17 4.1 Potential Noise Sources - Construction Phase ..................................................................... 17 4.2 Potential Noise Sources – Operational Phase ....................................................................... 20 4.3 Potential Noise Sources – Closure/ Demolition Phase ...................................................... 20

5 METHODS: NOISE IMPACT ASSESSMENT .............................................................. 21 5.1 Why noise concerns communities() ........................................................................................ 21

5.1.1 Annoyance associated with Industrial Processes ................................................................. 21 5.2 Impact Assessment Criteria .................................................................................................... 22

5.2.1 Overview: The Common Characteristics .............................................................................. 22 5.2.2 Noise criteria of concern ....................................................................................................... 23 5.2.3 Other noise sources of significance ....................................................................................... 25 5.2.4 Determining the Significance of the Noise Impact ............................................................... 26

5.3 Representation of noise levels ................................................................................................ 31

6 METHODS: CALCULATION OF NOISE CLIMATE .................................................. 32 6.1 Point Sources –Infrastructure ................................................................................................. 32

7 ASSUMPTIONS AND LIMITATIONS .......................................................................... 33 7.1 Calculating noise emissions – Adequacy of predictive methods ...................................... 33 7.2 Adequacy of Underlying Assumptions ................................................................................ 34

8 SCENARIO: FUTURE NOISE CLIMATE ....................................................................... 35 8.1 Investigated Scenarios ............................................................................................................. 35

8.1.1 Investigated Construction & Operational Scenarios ........................................................... 35

9 MODELLING RESULTS AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT .......................................... 37 9.1 Modelled Scenarios .................................................................................................................. 37

9.1.1 Construction LReq,1hr – Worst-case Maximum Noise Levels ................................................. 37 9.1.2 Operational LReq,1hr – Worst-case Maximum Noise Levels .................................................. 37

10 MITIGATION OPTIONS .................................................................................................. 44 10.1 Construction Phase .................................................................................................................. 44 10.2 Operational Phase .................................................................................................................... 44

11 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS ......................................................... 45

12 THE AUTHOR ..................................................................................................................... 46

13 REFERENCES ....................................................................................................................... 48

x


LIST OF TABLES

page Table 1-1: Available Reports/information ........................................................................................ 6 Table 2-1: IFC Table .7.1-Noise Level Guidelines .......................................................................... 15 Table 4-1: Potential maximum noise levels generated by construction equipment .................. 18 Table 4-2: Potential equivalent noise levels generated by various equipment .......................... 19 Table 5-1:Acceptable Zone Sound Levels for noise in districts (SANS 10103:2008).................. 25 Table 5-2:Impact Characteristic Terminology ................................................................................ 27 Table 5-3:Impact Type Definitions ................................................................................................... 28 Table 5-4:Definitions for Likelihood Designations ........................................................................ 28 Table 8.5: LR,d construction scenario investigated .......................................................................... 35 Table 9.6: Impact Assessment: Daytime Construction Phase (Eastern & Western Footprint Scenarios) ............................................................................................................................................. 38 Table 9-7:Impact Assessment: Daytime Operational Phase ......................................................... 41 Table 9-8:Impact Assessment: Night-time Operational Phase ..................................................... 41

LIST OF FIGURES

page Figure 1-1: Site map indicating the proposed project footprint 4 Figure 1-2: Study area potential noise-sensitive developments or receptors 5 Figure 5-1: Percentage of annoyed persons as a function of the day-evening-night noise exposure at the façade of a dwelling 22 Figure 5-2:Criteria to assess the significance of impacts stemming from noise 24 Figure 5-3:Typical Noise Sources and associated Sound Pressure Level 26 Figure 5-4:Noise Impact Significance Assessment Process 27 Figure 5-5: Impact Significance 30 Figure 8-1: Investigated Scenarios 36 Figure 9-1:Projected Construction Noise Levels - Eastern Footprint 39 Figure 9-2:Projected Construction Noise Levels - Western Footprint 40 Figure 9-3:Projected operational noise levels - daytime 42 Figure 9-4:Projected Operational Noise Levels – Night-time 43

APPENDICES Appendix A Glossary of Acoustic Terms, Definitions and General Information

xi


GLOSSARY OF ABBREVIATIONS AZSL Acceptable Zone Sound Level (Rating Level) dB Decibel EARES Enviro-Acoustic Research cc ECA Environment Conservation Act, 1989 (Act No. 78 of 1989) EIA Environmental Impact Assessment EMP Environmental Management Programme EMS Environmental Management System ENIA Environmental Noise Impact Assessment ENPAT Environmental Potential Atlas EP Equator Principle EPFI Equator Principle Financial Institutions f Fast setting GN Government Notice Hz Hertz i Impulse setting I&AP(s) Interested and Affected Party(ies) i.e. that is IEC International Electrotechnical Commission IFC International Finance Corporation km/h kilometres per hour m Meters mamsl Meters above mean sea level NCR Noise Control Regulations (under Section 25 of the ECA) NEMA National Environmental Management Act, 1998 (Act No. 107 of 1998) NSD Noise-Sensitive Development p/d per day SABS South African Bureau of Standards SANS South African National Standard SPL Sound Power Levels t Time ToR Terms of Reference UTM Universal Transverse Mercator WHO World Health Organisation

xii


1 INTRODUCTION

1.1 INTRODUCTION AND PURPOSE

Enviro-Acoustic Research cc (EARES) was commissioned by ERM Southern Africa (Pty) Ltd (also referred to as ERM) to determine the potential noise impact on the surrounding environment due to the Growth 4 project. Vopak (the developer) proposes certan expansion activities at the Farewell/ King sites, located in the Port of Durban, Kwa-Zulu Natal. This report describes the Noise Rating Levels and potential noise impact that demolition, commissioning and operations may have on the surrounding receptors sound environment, highlighting the methods used, potential issues identified, findings and recommendations. The Terms of Reference (ToR) for this study is in the guidelines and regulations of SANS 10103:2008, 10328:2008, Appendix 6 of GN R 982 of 2014 and GN R154 of 1992 (Noise Control Regulations) in terms of Section 25 of the Environment Conservation Act, 1989.

1.2 BRIEF PROJECT DESCRIPTION

1.2.1 Project Overview

The Vopak Efficiency (Growth 4) Project will include the expansion of the Farewell / King Sites to increase the storage capacity of petroleum products i.e. diesel, ULP, base oils and chemicals. This will involve:

Demolition of 38 Above ground Storage Tanks (AST’s) with a total storage capacity of 32 000m3 and associated infrastructure including:

drumming shed; two gantries; three pump stations; and hose exchanges located in bund 2A and bund 1A;

Construction of six new tanks with a storage capacity of 20 000m3 each (total storage capacity of 120 000m3) for the storage of clean petroleum products (worst-case assessed as diesel and ULP); Construction and commissioning of six new tanks with a storage capacity of 5 000m3 each for Classic Performance Products (CPP)/chemicals (caustic and MEG)/base oils (total storage capacity of 30 000m3); Construction of associated infrastructure including:

A 16 inch berth line for CPP from Farewell / King Site to berth 2; Two 16 inch berth lines for CPP from Farewell / King Site to berth to berth 9 with associated infrastructure; A new pump bay with the following: o Two backload pump for fuels (1400m3/hr max);

1


o Three backload/road loading pumps for base oils/chemicals (300m3/hr max);

o Four truck loading pumps for fuels (250m3/hr each); o Four 10 inch pipelines from Farewell to Blend plant for truck loading; o A new manifold, connected to Fuel 2 manifold, Fuel 2,5 tanks and

NMPP; and Upgrade of:

The road loading gantry at Farewell for Base oil/Chemicals; Fuel 2 substation or new substation; Connection of 16 inch berth lines to Berth 6 manifold; Overall Operation and Automation philosophy in line with Fuel 2 and Fuel 3; Investigate options to connect to site rail sidings; Upgrade building facilities (ablution and offices) on Farewell Site; and Investigate options to upgrade/ relocate the current effluent treatment plant.

All pipelines will be constructed above ground and along existing racks. No pipelines will be abandoned (decommissioned). Vopak will also be installing inner floating roofs and vapour recovery technology on all new tanks containing volatile products. In 2013, an Environmental Noise Impact Assessment (ENIA) was conducted for an alternative layout for the site. Subsequently a new layout is proposed, with EARES being contracted to conduct a desktop study on an Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) scale to determine the potential for a noise impact at receptors. The proposed project footprint in its regional setting are illustrated in Figure 1-1.

1.3 STUDY AREA

The study area (refer to Figure 1-2) includes a number of dwellings or potential noise-sensitive receptors in the vicinity of the proposed development. The study area is further described in terms of environmental components that may contribute or change the sound character in the area.

1.3.1 Topography

Considering the micro nature of the study area (in terms of acoustics) no natural ground features would act as acoustical buffers within the study area. Large industrial features such as buildings, stacks or tanks do feature predominantly within the study area and would screen noise levels from the facility to receptors.

1.3.2 Surrounding Land Use

The surrounding land uses consist of residential, transportation routes and industrial.

2


1.3.3 Roads and Railway lines

There exist many routes within the study area likely class 4 or higher roads. An industrial use railway siding intersects the project boundary and receptors within the study area.

1.3.4 Ground conditions and vegetation

The study area is located within an industrial development area and the area is highly modified. Taking available information into consideration , it is the opinion of the author that the ground conditions (when considering acoustic propagation on a ground surface) can be classified as medium to medium-hard, which implies that it is only moderately acoustically absorbent. It should be noted that this factor is only relevant for air-borne waves being reflected from the ground surface, with certain frequencies slightly absorbed by the vegetation.

1.3.5 Potential Sensitive Receptors

Residential areas and potential noise-sensitive developments/receptors were identified using tools such as Google Earth® up to a distance of 500(1)m from the closest project boundary (as illustrated in Figure 1-2). This was confirmed by citing available information (see section 1.4). Two receptors in the study area were numbered as NSD01 and NSD02 and represent the closest dwellings in the Fynnlands community in relation to the project footprint. NSD02 (app. 470m from project footprint) represents the closest receptors to the eastern project footprint, while NSD01 is on the western footprint (app. 460m).

(1)SANS 10328:2008. Methods for environmental noise impact assessments. Pg. 13, sometimes receptors are outside this criteria and are only identified for reference purpose.

3


Figure 1-1: Site map indicating the proposed project footprint

4


Figure 1-2: Study area potential noise-sensitive developments or receptors

5


1.4 AVAILABLE INFORMATION

The available information includes the previous study conducted for the project albeit for an alternative layout (see Table 1-1 below). Table 1-1: Available Reports/information Date Report/source

2013 Pro Acoustics Consortium. “Farewell/King Site Noise Impact Assessment and Mitigation Recommendations”. Oliver Knoppersen

1.5 TERMS OF REFERENCE

A noise impact assessment must be completed for the following reasons: if an industry is to be situated within 1 000 m of a noise-sensitive development (SANS 10328:2008); if any noise source is to be situated in the proximity of noise-sensitive developments (SANS 10328:2008); It is a controlled activity in terms of the NEMA regulations and an ENIA is required, because:

It may cause a disturbing noise that is prohibited in terms of section 18(1) of the Government Notice 579 of 2010;

It is generally required by the local or district authority as part of the environmental authorisation or planning approval in terms of Regulation 2(d) of GN R154 of 1992.

In addition, Appendix 6 of GN R 982 of 2014, issued in terms of the National Environmental Management Act, No. 107 of 1998, also defines minimum information requirements for specialist reports. In South Africa the document that addresses the issues specifically concerning environmental noise is SANS 10103:2008. This revision brought in line with the guidelines of the World Health Organisation (WHO). It provides the maximum average ambient noise levels during the day and night to which different types of developments indoors may be exposed. In addition, SANS 10328:2008 (Edition 3) specifies the methodology to assess the potential noise impacts on the environment due to a proposed activity that might impact on the environment. This standard also stipulates the minimum requirements to be investigated for scoping purposes. These minimum requirements are: 1. The purpose of the investigation; 2. A brief description of the planned development or the changes that are

being considered; 3. A brief description of the existing environment; 4. The identification of the noise sources that may affect the particular

development, together with their respective estimated sound pressure levels or sound power levels (or both);

5. The identified noise sources that were not taken into account and the reasons why they were not investigated;

6


6. The identified noise-sensitive developments and the estimated impact on them;

7. Any assumptions made with regard to the estimated values used; 8. An explanation, either by a brief description or by reference, of the

methods that were used to estimate the existing and predicted rating levels;

9. The location of the measurement or calculation points, i.e. a description, sketch or map;

10. Estimation of the environmental noise impact; 11. Alternatives that were considered and the results of those that were

investigated; 12. A list of all the interested or affected parties that offered any comments

with respect to the environmental noise impact investigation; 13. A detailed summary of all the comments received from interested or

affected parties as well as the procedures and discussions followed to deal with them;

14. Conclusions that were reached; 15. Recommendations, i.e. if there could be a significant impact, or if more

information is needed, a recommendation that an environmental noise impact assessment be conducted; and

16. If remedial measures will provide an acceptable solution, which would prevent a significant impact, these remedial measures should be outlined in detail and included in the final authorisation, if the approval is obtained from the relevant authority. If the remedial measures deteriorate after a certain time and a follow-up auditing or maintenance programme (or both) is instituted, this programme should be included in the final recommendations and accepted in the authorisation if the approval is obtained from the relevant authority.

Furthermore the SANS 10328:2008 and Noise Control Regulations define a noise-sensitive development to include any of the following: a) ‘residential districts; b) non-residential districts; c) educational, residential, office and health care buildings and their surroundings; d) churches and their surroundings; e) auditoriums and concert halls and their surroundings; and f) recreational areas’. Both the construction/rehabilitation of the project and the operations thereof were investigated in terms of acoustics (SANS 10328:2008 recommendation).

7


2 LEGAL CONTEXT, POLICIES AND GUIDELINES

2.1 THE REPUBLIC OF SOUTH AFRICA CONSTITUTION ACT (“THE CONSTITUTION”)

The environmental rights contained in section 24 of the Constitution provide that everyone is entitled to an environment that is not harmful to his or her well-being. In the context of noise, this requires a determination of what level of noise is harmful to well-being. The general approach of the common law is to define an acceptable level of noise as that which the reasonable person can be expected to tolerate in the particular circumstances. The subjectivity of this approach can be problematic, which has led to the development of noise standards (see Section 2.5). “Noise pollution” is specifically included in Part B of Schedule 5 of the Constitution, which means that noise pollution control is a local authority competence, provided that the local authority concerned has the capacity to carry out this function.

2.2 THE ENVIRONMENT CONSERVATION ACT (ACT 73 OF 1989)

The Environment Conservation Act (“ECA”) allows the Minister of Environmental Affairs and Tourism (“now the Ministry of Water and Environmental Affairs”) to make regulations regarding noise, among other concerns. See also section 2.2.1.

2.2.1 National Noise Control Regulations (GN R154 of 1992)

The national Noise Control Regulations (GN R 154 of 1992) were promulgated in terms of section 25 of the ECA. The NCRs were revised under Government Notice Number R. 55 of 14 January 1994 to make it obligatory for all authorities to apply the regulations. Subsequently, in terms of Schedule 5 of the Constitution of South Africa of 1996 legislative responsibility for administering the noise control regulations was devolved to provincial and local authorities. Provincial noise control regulations exist in the Free State, Gauteng and Western Cape provinces. The National Noise Control Regulations (GN R154 1992) defines: "controlled area" as:

a piece of land designated by a local authority where, in the case of-- a) Road transport noise in the vicinity of a road-

i. the reading on an integrating impulse sound level meter, taken outdoors at the end of a period extending from 06:00 to 24:00 while such meter is in operation, exceeds 65 dBA; or

ii. the calculated outdoor equivalent continuous "A"-weighted sound pressure level at a height of at least 1,2 meters, but not more than 1,4 meters, above the ground for a period e, exceeds 65 dBA.

8


"disturbing noise" as: noise level which exceeds the zone sound level or, if no zone sound level has been designated, a noise level which exceeds the ambient sound level at the same measuring point by 7 dBA or more. "zone sound level" as: a derived dBA value determined indirectly by means of a series of measurements, calculations or table readings and designated by a local authority for an area. This is the same as the Rating Level as defined in SANS 10103. In addition: In terms of Regulation 2 - “A local authority may – (c):” if a noise emanating from a building, premises, vehicle, recreational vehicle or street is a disturbing noise or noise nuisance, or may in the opinion of the local authority concerned be a disturbing noise or noise nuisance, instruct in writing the person causing such noise or who is responsible therefor, or the owner or occupant of such building or premises from which or from where such noise emanates or may emanate, or all such persons, to discontinue or cause to be discontinued such noise, or to take steps to lower the lever of the noise to a level conforming to the requirements of these Regulations within the period stipulated in the instruction: Provided that the provisions of this paragraph shall not apply in respect of a disturbing noise or noise nuisance caused by rail vehicles or aircraft which are not used as recreational vehicles; (d): before changes are made to existing facilities or existing uses of land or buildings, or before new buildings are erected, in writing require that noise impact assessments or tests are conducted to the satisfaction of that local authority by the owner, developer, tenant or occupant of the facilities, land or buildings or that, for the purposes of regulation 3(b) or (f) designate a controlled area in its area of jurisdiction or amend or cancel an existing controlled area by notice in the Official Gazette concerned. In terms of Regulation 4 of the Noise Control Regulations: “No person shall make, produce or cause a disturbing noise, or allow it to be made, produced or caused by any person, machine, device or apparatus or any combination thereof”. General prohibition 3. No person shall - (c) make changes to existing facilities or existing uses of land or buildings or erect new buildings, if it shall in the opinion of a local authority house or cause activities which shall, after such change or erection, cause a disturbing noise, unless precautionary measures to prevent the disturbing noise have been taken to the satisfaction of the local authority. Clause 7.(1) however exempts noise of the following activities, namely - “The provisions of these regulations shall not apply, if - (a) the emission of sound is for the purposes of warning people of a dangerous situation; (b) the emission of sound takes place during an emergency.”

9


2.3 THE NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT ACT (ACT 107 OF 1998)

The National Environmental Management Act (“NEMA”) defines “pollution” to include any change in the environment, including noise. A duty therefore arises under section 28 of NEMA to take reasonable measures while establishing and operating any facility to prevent noise pollution occurring. NEMA sets out measures, which may be regarded as reasonable. They include the following measures:

to investigate, assess and evaluate the impact on the environment; to inform and educate employees about the environmental risks of their work and the manner in which their tasks must be performed to avoid causing significant pollution or degradation of the environment; to cease, modify or control any act, activity or process causing the pollution or degradation; to contain or prevent the movement of the pollution or degradation; to eliminate any source of the pollution or degradation; and to remedy the effects of the pollution or degradation.

In addition, Appendix 6 of GN R 982 of 2014, issued in terms of this Act, has general requirements for EAPs and specialists. It also defines minimum information requirements for specialist reports.

2.3.1 Appendix 6 of GN R 982 of 2014

These regulations define the required information to compile a specialist report. Chapter 4, Part 2 highlights this in section (8) “A specialist report must contain all information set out in Appendix 6 to these Regulations”. These requirements are further defined as: Appendix 6 “Specialist reports 1. (1) A specialist report prepared in terms of these Regulations must contain- (a) details of-

(i) the specialist who prepared the report; and (ii) the expertise of that specialist to compile a specialist report including a curriculum vitae;

(b) a declaration that the specialist is independent in a form as may be specified by the competent authority; (c) an indication of the scope of, and the purpose for which, the report was prepared; (d) the date and season of the site investigation and the relevance of the season to the outcome of the assessment; (e) a description of the methodology adopted in preparing the report or carrying out them specialised process; (f) the specific identified sensitivity of the site related to the activity and its associated structures and infrastructure; (g) an identification of any areas to be avoided, including buffers;

10


(h) a map superimposing the activity including the associated structures and infrastructure on the environmental sensitivities of the site including areas to be avoided, including buffers; (i) a description of any assumptions made and any uncertainties or gaps in knowledge; (j) a description of the findings and potential implications of such findings on the impact of the proposed activity, including identified alternatives on the environment; (k) any mitigation measures for inclusion in the EMPr; (l) any conditions for inclusion in the environmental authorisation; (m) any monitoring requirements for inclusion in the EMPr or environmental authorisation; (n) a reasoned opinion-

(i) as to whether the proposed activity or portions thereof should be authorised; and (ii) if the opinion is that the proposed activity or portions thereof should be authorised, any avoidance, management and mitigation measures that should be included in the EMPr, and where applicable, the closure plan;

(o) a description of any consultation process that was undertaken during the course of preparing the specialist report; (p) a summary and copies of any comments received during any consultation process and where applicable all responses thereto; and (q) any other information requested by the competent authority.

2.4 NATIONAL ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT: AIR QUALITY ACT (“AQA” – ACT 39 OF 2004)

Section 34 of the National Environmental Management: Air Quality Act (Act 39 of 2004) makes provision for:

(1) the Minister to prescribe essential national noise standards - (a) for the control of noise, either in general or by specified machinery or activities or in specified places or areas; or (b) for determining –

(i) a definition of noise (ii) the maximum levels of noise

(2) When controlling noise the provincial and local spheres of government are bound by any prescribed national standards.

This section of the Act is in force, but no such standards have yet been promulgated. However, draft regulations have been promulgated for adoption by local authorities. An atmospheric emission licence issued in terms of section 22 may contain conditions in respect of noise.

11


2.4.1 Model Air Quality Management By-law for adoption and adaptation by municipalities (GN 579 of 2010)

Model Air Quality Management By-Laws for adoption and adaptation by municipalities were published in Notice 579 of 2010. The main aim of the model air quality management by-law is to assist municipalities in the development of their air quality management by-law within their jurisdictions. It is also the aim of the model by-law to ensure uniformity across the country when dealing with air quality management challenges. Therefore, the model by-law is developed to be generic to deal with most of the air quality management challenges. With noise control being covered under the Air Quality Act (Act 39 of 2004), noise is also managed in a separate section under this Government Notice.

IT IS NOT the aim of the model by-law to have legal force and effect on municipalities when published in the Gazette; and IT IS NOT the aim of the model by-law to impose the by-law on municipalities.

Therefore, a municipality will have to follow the legal process set out in the Local Government: Municipal Systems Act, 2000 (Act No. 32 of 2000) when adopting and adapting the model by-law to its local jurisdictions.

2.5 NOISE STANDARDS

There are a few South African scientific standards (SABS) relevant to noise from developments, industry and roads. They are:

SANS 10103:2008. ‘The measurement and rating of environmental noise with respect to annoyance and to speech communication’. SANS 10210:2004. ‘Calculating and predicting road traffic noise’. SANS 10328:2008. ‘Methods for environmental noise impact assessments’. SANS 10357:2004. ‘The calculation of sound propagation by the Concave method’. SANS 10181:2003. ‘The Measurement of Noise Emitted by Road Vehicles when Stationary’. SANS 10205:2003. ‘The Measurement of Noise Emitted by Motor Vehicles in Motion’.

The relevant standards use the equivalent continuous rating level as a basis for determining what is acceptable. The levels may take single event noise into account, but single event noise by itself does not determine whether noise levels are acceptable for land use purposes. With regards to SANS 10103:2008, the recommendations are likely to inform decisions by authorities, but non-compliance with the standard will not necessarily render an activity unlawful per se. It must be noted that SANS 10103:2008 does stipulate “for industries legitimately operating in an industrial district during the entire 24 h day/night cycle, LReq,d = LReq,n

=70 dBA can be considered as typical and normal”.

12


2.6 INTERNATIONAL GUIDELINES

While a number of international guidelines and standards exists, those selected below are used by numerous Eueropean countries for environmental noise management.

2.6.1 Guidelines for Community Noise (WHO, 1999)

The World Health Organization’s (WHO) document on the Guidelines for Community Noise is the outcome of the WHO expert task force meeting held in London, United Kingdom, in April 1999. It is based on the document entitled “Community Noise” that was prepared for the World Health Organization and published in 1995 by the Stockholm University and Karolinska Institute. The scope of WHO's effort to derive guidelines for community noise is to consolidate actual scientific knowledge on the health impacts of community noise and to provide guidance to environmental health authorities and professionals trying to protect people from the harmful effects of noise in non-industrial environments. It discusses the specific effects of noise on communities including:

Interference with communication, noise-induced hearing impairment, sleep disturbance effects, cardiovascular and psychophysiological effects, mental health effects, effects on performance, annoyance responses and effects on social behavior.

It further discusses how noise can affect (and propose guideline noise levels) specific environments such as residential dwellings, schools, preschools, hospitals, ceremonies, festivals and entertainment events, sounds through headphones, impulsive sounds from toys, fireworks and firearms, and parklands and conservation areas. To protect the majority of people from being affected by noise during the daytime, it proposes that sound levels at outdoor living areas should not exceed 55 dB LAeq for a steady, continuous noise. To protect the majority of people from being moderately annoyed during the day, the outdoor sound pressure level should not exceed 50 dB LAeq. At night, equivalent sound levels at the outside façades of the living spaces should not exceed 45 dBA and 60 dBA LAmax so that people may sleep with bedroom windows open. It is critical to note that this guideline requires the sound level measuring instrument to be set on the “fast” detection setting.

2.6.2 Night Noise Guidelines for Europe (WHO, 2009)

Refining previous Community Noise Guidelines issued in 1999, and incorporating more recent research, the World Health Organization has released a comprehensive report on the health effects of night time noise, along with new (non-mandatory) guidelines for use in Europe. Rather than a maximum of 30 dB inside at night (which equals 45-50 dB max outside), the WHO now recommends a maximum year-round outside night-time noise average of 40 db to avoid sleep disturbance and its related health effects. The

13


report notes that only below 30 dB (outside annual average) are “no significant biological effects observed,” and that between 30 and 40 dB, several effects are observed, with the chronically ill and children being more susceptible; however, “even in the worst cases the effects seem modest.” Elsewhere, the report states more definitively, “There is no sufficient evidence that the biological effects observed at the level below 40 dB (night, outside) are harmful to health.” At levels over 40 dB “Adverse health effects are observed” and “many people have to adapt their lives to cope with the noise at night. Vulnerable groups are more severely affected.” The 184-page report offers a comprehensive overview of research into the various effects of noise on sleep quality and health (including the health effects of non-waking sleep arousal), and is recommended reading for anyone working with noise issues. The use of an outdoor noise standard is in part designed to acknowledge that people do prefer to leave windows open when sleeping, though the year-long average may be difficult to obtain (it would require longer-term sound monitoring than is usually budgeted for by either industry or neighbourhood groups). While recommending the use of the average level, the report notes that some instantaneous effects occur in relation to specific maximum noise levels, but that the health effects of these “cannot be easily established.”

2.6.3 Equator Principles

The Equator Principles (EPs) are a voluntary set of standards for determining, assessing and managing social and environmental risk in project financing. Equator Principles Financial Institutions (EPFIs) commit to not providing loans to projects where the borrower will not or is unable to comply with their respective social and environmental policies and procedures that implement the EPs. The Equator Principles were developed by private sector banks and were launched in June 2003. Revision III of the EPs has been in place since June 2013. The participating banks chose to model the Equator Principles on the environmental standards of the World Bank (1999) and the social policies of the International Finance Corporation (IFC). Eighty-three financial institutions (2016) have adopted the Equator Principles, which have become the de facto standard for banks and investors on how to assess major development projects around the world.

2.6.4 IFC: General EHS Guidelines – Environmental Noise Management

These guidelines are applicable to noise created beyond the property boundaries of a development that conforms to the Equator Principles. The environmental standards of the World Bank have been integrated into the social policies of the IFC since April 2007 as the International Finance Corporation Environmental, Health and Safety (EHS) Guidelines.

14


It states that noise prevention and mitigation measures should be applied where predicted or measured noise impacts from project facilities/operations exceed the applicable noise level guideline at the most sensitive point of reception. The preferred method for controlling noise from stationary sources is to implement noise control measures at source. It goes as far as to proposed methods for the prevention and control of noise emissions, including:

Selecting equipment with lower sound power levels; Installing silencers for fans; Installing suitable mufflers on engine exhausts and compressor components; Installing acoustic enclosures for equipment casing radiating noise; Improving the acoustic performance of constructed buildings, apply sound insulation; Installing acoustic barriers without gaps and with a continuous minimum surface density of 10 kg/m2 in order to minimize the transmission of sound through the barrier. Barriers should be located as close to the source or to the receptor location to be effective; Installing vibration isolation for mechanical equipment; Limiting the hours of operation for specific pieces of equipment or operations, especially mobile sources operating through community areas ; Re-locating noise sources to less sensitive areas to take advantage of distance and shielding; Placement of permanent facilities away from community areas if possible; Taking advantage of the natural topography as a noise buffer during facility design; Reducing project traffic routing through community areas wherever possible; Planning flight routes, timing and altitude for aircraft (airplane and helicopter) flying over community areas; and Developing a mechanism to record and respond to complaints.

It sets noise level guidelines (see Table 2-1) and highlights the certain monitoring requirements pre- and post-development. It adds another criterion in that the existing background ambient noise level should not rise by more than 3 dBA. This criterion will effectively sterilize large areas of any development. Therefore, it is EARE’s considered opinion that this criterion was introduced to address cases where the existing ambient noise level is already at, or in excess of the recommended limits. Table 2-1: IFC Table .7.1-Noise Level Guidelines

Receptor type One hour LAeq (dBA)

Daytime 07:00 - 22:00

Night-time 22:00 – 07:00

Residential; institutional; educational 55 45 Industrial; commercial 70 70 The document uses the LAeq,1 hr noise descriptors to define noise levels. It does not determine the detection period, but refers to the IEC standards, which

15


requires the fast detector setting on the Sound Level Meter during measurements in Europe.

2.6.5 European Parliament Directive 200/14/EC

Directive 2000/14/EC relating to the noise emission in the environment by equipment for use outdoors was adopted by the European Parliament and the Council and first published in May 2000 and applied from 3 January 2002. The directive placed sound power limits on equipment to be used outdoors in a suburban or urban setting. Failure to comply with these regulations may result in products being prohibited from being placed on the EU market. Equipment list is vast and includes machinery such as compaction machineries, dozers, dumpers, excavators, etc. Manufacturers as a result started to consider noise emission levels from their products to ensure that their equipment will continue to have a market in most countries.

16


3 CURRENT ENVIRONMENTAL SOUND CHARACTER

Ambient (background) noise levels were measured previously by a specialist during 2013. No baseline measurements were conducted by EARES with the onsite measurements conducted by the specialist in 2013 referenced (see report specifications section 1.4).

4 INVESTIGATION OF EXISTING AND FUTURE NOISE SOURCES

Two phases were investigated and modelled namely the construction and the operations of the facility (SANS10325:2008 recommendation).

4.1 POTENTIAL NOISE SOURCES - CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Potential maximum noise levels generated by construction equipment and the potential extent are presented in Table 4-1. The potential extent depends on a number of factors, including the prevailing ambient sound levels during the instance the maximum noise event occurred, the spectral character of the noise, and the ambient surroundings. The average or equivalent sound level is other factors that affects the ambient sound levels and is the constant sound level that the receptor can experience. Typical sound power levels associated with various activities that may be found at a construction site are presented in Table 4-1. It should be noted that many pieces of construction equipment designed to operate in a suburban setting conform to certain international standards in terms of noise generation (see section 2.6.6). The basic functions of an acoustical nature during the construction phase are briefly discussed below:

Cutting of steel tanks with welders. The dismantling of existing tank would require steel cutting by means of welders; Generators to supply onsite power; Mobile cranes for construction phase; Grit blasting; and Riveting of steel tank and structures.

17


Table 4-1: Potential maximum noise levels generated by construction equipment

Equipment Description(1.1) Impact Device?

Maximum Sound Power Levels (dBA)

Operational Noise Level at given distance considering potential maximum noise levels (Cumulative as well as the mitigatory effect of potential barriers or other mitigation not included –

simple noise propagation modelling only considering distance) (dBA) 5 m 10 m 20 m 50 m 100 m 150 m 200 m 300 m 500 m 750 m 1000 m 2000 m

Compactor (ground) No 114.7 89.7 83.7 77.6 69.7 63.7 60.1 57.6 54.1 49.7 46.2 43.7 37.6 Compressor (air) No 114.7 89.7 83.7 77.6 69.7 63.7 60.1 57.6 54.1 49.7 46.2 43.7 37.6 Concrete Batch Plant No 117.7 92.7 86.7 80.6 72.7 66.7 63.1 60.6 57.1 52.7 49.2 46.7 40.6 Concrete Mixer Truck No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Concrete Pump Truck No 116.7 91.7 85.7 79.6 71.7 65.7 62.1 59.6 56.1 51.7 48.2 45.7 39.6 Concrete Saw No 124.7 99.7 93.7 87.6 79.7 73.7 70.1 67.6 64.1 59.7 56.2 53.7 47.6 Crane No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Generator No 116.7 91.7 85.7 79.6 71.7 65.7 62.1 59.6 56.1 51.7 48.2 45.7 39.6 Generator (<25KVA, VMS Signs) No 104.7 79.7 73.7 67.6 59.7 53.7 50.1 47.6 44.1 39.7 36.2 33.7 27.6

Grader No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Impact Pile Driver Yes 129.7 104.7 98.7 92.6 84.7 78.7 75.1 72.6 69.1 64.7 61.2 58.7 52.6 Jackhammer Yes 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Mounted Impact Hammer Yes 124.7 99.7 93.7 87.6 79.7 73.7 70.1 67.6 64.1 59.7 56.2 53.7 47.6 Pickup Truck No 89.7 64.7 58.7 52.6 44.7 38.7 35.1 32.6 29.1 24.7 21.2 18.7 12.6 Pumps No 111.7 86.7 80.7 74.6 66.7 60.7 57.1 54.6 51.1 46.7 43.2 40.7 34.6 Rivit Buster/Chipping Gun Yes 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6

Rock Drill No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Sand Blasting (single nozzle) No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6

Vacuum Excavator (Vac-Truck) No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6

Vibrating Hopper No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Vibratory Concrete Mixer No 114.7 89.7 83.7 77.6 69.7 63.7 60.1 57.6 54.1 49.7 46.2 43.7 37.6 Vibratory Pile Driver No 129.7 104.7 98.7 92.6 84.7 78.7 75.1 72.6 69.1 64.7 61.2 58.7 52.6 Warning Horn No 119.7 94.7 88.7 82.6 74.7 68.7 65.1 62.6 59.1 54.7 51.2 48.7 42.6 Welder/Torch No 107.7 82.7 76.7 70.6 62.7 56.7 53.1 50.6 47.1 42.7 39.2 36.7 30.6 (1.1)Equipment list and Sound Power Level source: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/environment/noise/construction_noise/handbook/handbook09.cfm

18


Table 4-2: Potential equivalent noise levels generated by various equipment

Equipment Description

Equivalent (average)

Sound Levels (dBA)

Operational Noise Level at given distance considering equivalent (average) sound power emission levels (Cumulative and mitigation effect of potential barriers or other mitigation not included –

simple noise propagation modelling only considering distance) (dBA)

5 m 10 m 20 m 50 m 100 m 150 m 200 m 300 m 500 m 750 m 1000 m 2000 m Bulldozer CAT D10 111.9 86.9 80.9 74.9 66.9 60.9 57.4 54.9 51.3 46.9 43.4 40.9 34.9 Bulldozer CAT D11 113.3 88.4 82.3 76.3 68.4 62.3 58.8 56.3 52.8 48.4 44.8 42.3 36.3 Bulldozer CAT D9 111.9 86.9 80.9 74.9 66.9 60.9 57.4 54.9 51.3 46.9 43.4 40.9 34.9 Bulldozer CAT D6 108.2 83.3 77.3 71.2 63.3 57.3 53.7 51.2 47.7 43.3 39.8 37.3 31.2 Bulldozer CAT D5 107.4 82.4 76.4 70.4 62.4 56.4 52.9 50.4 46.9 42.4 38.9 36.4 30.4 Bulldozer Komatsu 375 114.0 89.0 83.0 77.0 69.0 63.0 59.5 57.0 53.4 49.0 45.5 43.0 37.0 Dumper/Haul truck - CAT 700 115.9 91.0 85.0 78.9 71.0 65.0 61.4 58.9 55.4 51.0 47.5 45.0 38.9 Dumper/Haul truck - Terex 30 ton 112.2 87.2 81.2 75.2 67.2 61.2 57.7 55.2 51.7 47.2 43.7 41.2 35.2 Excavator - Hitachi EX1200 113.1 88.1 82.1 76.1 68.1 62.1 58.6 56.1 52.6 48.1 44.6 42.1 36.1 Excavator - Hitachi 870 (80 t) 108.1 83.1 77.1 71.1 63.1 57.1 53.6 51.1 47.5 43.1 39.6 37.1 31.1 FEL - Bell L1806C 102.7 77.7 71.7 65.7 57.7 51.7 48.2 45.7 42.1 37.7 34.2 31.7 25.7 FEL - CAT 950G 102.1 77.2 71.2 65.1 57.2 51.2 47.6 45.1 41.6 37.2 33.7 31.2 25.1 FEL - Komatsu WA380 100.7 75.7 69.7 63.7 55.7 49.7 46.2 43.7 40.1 35.7 32.2 29.7 23.7 General noise 108.8 83.8 77.8 71.8 63.8 57.8 54.2 51.8 48.2 43.8 40.3 37.8 31.8 Grader - Operational Hitachi 108.9 83.9 77.9 71.9 63.9 57.9 54.4 51.9 48.4 43.9 40.4 37.9 31.9 Grader 110.9 85.9 79.9 73.9 65.9 59.9 56.4 53.9 50.3 45.9 42.4 39.9 33.9 Water Dozer, CAT 113.8 88.8 82.8 76.8 68.8 62.8 59.3 56.8 53.3 48.8 45.3 42.8 36.8

19


4.2 POTENTIAL NOISE SOURCES – OPERATIONAL PHASE

Typical sound power levels associated with various equipment (for reference purpose) are presented in Table 4-1 (maximum noises) and Table 4-2 (average or equivalent noises). As can be seen from this table, there is a range of equipment, frequently with different sound power emission levels and spectral characteristics. The basic modus operandi of the primary noise sources at Vopak envisaged for the scenarios is briefly discussed below:

4 x haul tanker trucks loading product while idling at gantries; and The operations of a 4 x centrifugal pumps for tanker loading.

4.3 POTENTIAL NOISE SOURCES – CLOSURE/ DEMOLITION PHASE

The closure activities will not be considered in this report. In general, closure activities have a significantly lower noise impact than the construction phase. The removal phase will therefore not be considered during this document for the following reasons:

Removal and rehabilitation activities are generally less intense than construction activities; Noise levels are lower and will be limited to daylight hours. This reduces the significance of the noise impact; and The impact would be similar or less than the construction phase impact.

20


5 METHODS: NOISE IMPACT ASSESSMENT

5.1 WHY NOISE CONCERNS COMMUNITIES(2)

Noise can be defined as "unwanted sound", and an audible acoustic energy that adversely affects the physiological and/or psychological well-being of people, or which disturbs or impairs the convenience or peace of any person. One can generalise by saying that sound becomes unwanted when it:

Hinders speech communication; Impedes the thinking process; Interferes with concentration; Obstructs activities (work, leisure and sleeping); and Presents a health risk due to hearing damage.

However, it is important to remember that whether a given sound is "noise" depends on the listener or hearer. The driver playing loud rock music on their car radio hears only music, but the person in the traffic behind them hears nothing but noise. Response to noise is not an empirical absolute, as it is seen as a multi-faceted psychological concept, including behavioural and evaluative aspects. For instance, in some cases, annoyance is seen as an outcome of disturbances, and in other cases it is seen as an indication of the degree of helplessness with respect to the noise source. Noise does not need to be loud to be considered “disturbing”. One can refer to a dripping tap in the quiet of the night, or the irritating “thump-thump” of the music from a neighbouring house at night when one would prefer to sleep. Severity of the annoyance depends on factors such as:

Background sound levels and the background sound levels the receptor is used to; The manner in which the receptor can control the noise (helplessness); The time, unpredictability, frequency distribution, duration, and intensity of the noise; The physiological state of the receptor; and The attitude of the receptor about the emitter (noise source).

5.1.1 Annoyance associated with Industrial Processes

Annoyance is the most widely acknowledged effect of environmental noise exposure, and is considered to be the most widespread. It is estimated that less than a third of the individual noise annoyance is accounted for by acoustic parameters, and that the non-acoustic factors plays a major role. Non-acoustic factors that have been identified include age, economic dependence on the

(2)World Health Organization, 1999; Noise quest, 2010; Journal of Acoustical Society of America, 2009

21


noise source, attitude towards the noise source and self-reported noise sensitivity. On the basis of a number of studies into noise annoyance, exposure-response relationships were derived for high annoyance from different noise sources. These relationships, illustrated in Figure 5-1, are recommended in a European Union position paper published in 2002(3), stipulating policy regarding the quantification of annoyance. This can be used in environmental health impact assessment and cost-benefit analysis to translate noise maps into overviews of the numbers of persons that may be annoyed, thereby giving insight into the situation expected in the long-term. It is not applicable to local complaint-type situations or to an assessment of the short-term effects of a change in noise climate. Figure 5-1: Percentage of annoyed persons as a function of the day-evening-

night noise exposure at the façade of a dwelling

5.2 IMPACT ASSESSMENT CRITERIA

5.2.1 Overview: The Common Characteristics

The word "noise" is generally used to convey a negative response or attitude to the sound received by a listener. There are four common characteristics of sound, any or all of which determine listener response and the subsequent definition of the sound as "noise". These characteristics are: • Intensity; • Loudness; • Annoyance; and • Offensiveness.

(3) Image from presentation, Almgren (2011). Sources Miliue, 2010, European Comm., 2010, Jansen, 2009.

22


Of the four common characteristics of sound, intensity is the only one that is not subjective and can be quantified. Loudness is a subjective measure of the effect sound has on the human ear. As a quantity it is therefore complicated, but has been defined by experimentation on subjects known to have normal hearing. The annoyance and offensive characteristics of noise are also subjective. Whether or not a noise causes annoyance mostly depends upon its reception by an individual, the environment in which it is heard, the type of activity and mood of the person and how acclimatised or familiar that person is to the sound.

5.2.2 Noise criteria of concern

The criteria used in this report were drawn from the criteria for the description and assessment of environmental impacts from the EIA Regulations of 2014 in terms of the NEMA, SANS 10103:2008, and guidelines from the WHO. There are a number of criteria that are of concern for the assessment of noise impacts. These can be summarised in the following manner:

Increase in noise levels: People or communities often react to an increase in the ambient noise level they are used to, caused by a new source of noise. With regards to the Noise Control Regulations, an increase of more than 7 dBA is considered a disturbing noise. See also Figure 5-2; Zone Sound Levels: Previously referred to as the acceptable rating levels, it sets acceptable noise levels for various areas. See also Table 5-1; and Absolute or total noise levels: Depending on their activities, people generally are tolerant to noise up to a certain absolute level, e.g. 65 dBA. Anything above this level will be considered unacceptable.

In South Africa, the document that addresses the issues concerning environmental noise is SANS 10103:2008 (See also Table 5-1). It provides the equivalent ambient noise levels (referred to as Rating Levels), LReq,D and LReq,N, during the day and night respectively to which different types of developments may be exposed. Due to the variance in ambient sound measurements, it is recommended that the project consider the guideline levels for residential use as set by international institutions such as WHO, World Bank and IFC for residential areas, as well as the South African SANS10103:2008 guidelines.

23


Figure 5-2:Criteria to assess the significance of impacts stemming from noise

No onsite measurements were conducted by EARES for this project. However a previous Noise Impact Assessment conducted for the project (an alternative layout) was conducted in 2013. Based on the onsite measurement findings of this study (see information in section 1.4) the following Rating Level will be used:

Busy urban district - daytime rating of LReq,d of 60 dBA; and Busy urban district - night-time rating LReq,n of 50 dBA.

International guidelines should also be considered. The IFC residential, institutional and educational referenced areas include ratings of:

Use of Lday of 55 dBA during the daytimes; and Use of Lnight of 45 dBA during the night-time.

SANS 10103:2008 also provides a guideline for estimating community response to an increase in the general ambient noise level caused by an

relevance: An increase of 3 dBA or less will not cause any response from a

community. It should be noted that for a person with average hearing acuity an increase of less than 3 dBA in the general ambient noise level would not be noticeable.

An increase of between 3 dBA and 5 dBA will elicit ‘little’ community response with ‘sporadic complaints’. People will just be able to notice a change in the sound character in the area.

An increase of between 5 dBA and 15 dBA will elicit a ‘medium’ community response with ‘widespread complaints’. In addition, an increase of 10 dBA is subjectively perceived as a doubling in the loudness of a noise. For an increase of more than 15 dBA the community reaction will be ‘strong’ with ‘threats of community action’.

24


Note that an increase of more than 7 dBA is defined as a disturbing noise and prohibited by national and provincial noise control regulations. Table 5-1:Acceptable Zone Sound Levels for noise in districts (SANS

10103:2008)

5.2.3 Other noise sources of significance

In addition, other noise sources that may be present should also be considered. During the day, people are generally bombarded with the sounds from numerous sources considered “normal”, such as animal sounds, conversation, amenities and appliances (TV/Radio/CD playing in background, computer(s), freezers/fridges, etc.). This excludes activities that may generate additional noise associated with normal work. At night, sounds that are present are natural sounds from animals, wind and other sounds we consider “normal”, such as the hum (magnetostriction) from a variety of appliances such as freezers and fridges, drawing standby power. Figure 5-1 illustrates the sound levels associated with some equipment or in certain rooms. However, this is illustrative purposes only, as there are many manufacturers with different equipment, each with a different noise emission character.

25


Figure 5-3:Typical Noise Sources and associated Sound Pressure Level

5.2.4 Determining the Significance of the Noise Impact

The impact assessment criteria are devised from the ERM IA Standard as well as the ERM Noise Impacts guideline. The process of determining the noise impact significance is illustrated in Figure 5-4.

Sources and Levels of Noise exposure

0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180

Hearing Threshold (average)

Quiet house

PVR DSTV Decoder

Whispered Conversation

Quiet Office

Average Home

Bird singing (garden)

Aviary

Normal Conversation

Car (Petroleum)

Toilet Flushing

Washing Machine (washing)

Vacuum Cleaner

Large Department Store

High Road Traffic

Truck

Tractor (in cab)

Tractor (next to it)

Piano

Train

Alarm Clock

Electric Drill

Tractor under load (in cab)

Petrol-driven Grass Mower

Circular Saw

Pig House at Feeding Time

Disco

Unsilenced Air Discharge

Hand Grinding of Metal

Rock Concert

Jet Taking Off

Shotgun (Impulse peak)

Vari

ous

Noi

se S

ourc

es

Sound Level (dBA)

* 65

dBA

26


Figure 5-4:Noise Impact Significance Assessment Process

Once the prediction of n o i s e impacts is complete, each impact is described in terms of its various relevant characteristics (e.g., type, scale, duration, frequency, extent). The terminology used to describe impact characteristics is shown in Table 5-2. Table 5-2:Impact Characteristic Terminology Characteristic Definition Designations Type A descriptor indicating the

relationship of the impact to the Project (in terms of cause and effect).

Direct Indirect Induced

Extent The “reach” of the impact (e.g., confined to a small area around the Project Footprint, projected for several kilometres, etc.).

Footprint Local Regional International

Duration The time period over which a resource or / and receptor is affected.

Temporary Short-term Long-term Permanent

Scale

The scale of the impact (e.g., the size of the area damaged or impacted, the fraction of a resource that is lost or affected, etc.)

Low Medium Large

Frequency A measure of the constancy or periodicity of the impact.

Infrequent Constant

The definitions for the type designations are shown in Table 5-3. Definitions for the other designations are resource/receptor-specific, and are discussed in the resource/receptor-specific impact assessment chapters presented later in this report.

27


Table 5-3:Impact Type Definitions Designations Definition

Direct Impacts that result from a direct interaction between the Project and a resource/receptor (e.g., between occupation of a plot of land and the habitats which are affected).

Indirect Impacts that follow on from the direct interactions between the Project and its environment as a result of subsequent interactions within the environment (e.g., viability of a species population resulting from loss of part of a habitat as a result of the Project occupying a plot of land).

Induced Impacts that result from other activities (which are not part of the Project) that happen as a consequence of the Project (e.g., influx of camp followers resulting from the importation of a large Project workforce).

The above characteristics and definitions apply to planned and unplanned events. An additional characteristic that pertains only to unplanned events is likelihood. The likelihood of an unplanned event occurring is designated using a qualitative scale, as described in Table 5-4. Table 5-4:Definitions for Likelihood Designations

Likelihood Definition Unlikely The event is unlikely but may occur at some time during normal operating

conditions. Possible The event is likely to occur at some time during normal operating conditions.

Likely The event will occur during normal operating conditions (i.e., it is essentially

inevitable). Once an impact’s characteristics are defined, the next step in the impact assessment phase is to assign each impact a ‘magnitude’. Magnitude is typically a function of some combination (depending on the resource/receptor in question) of the following impact characteristics:

Extent; Duration; Scale; and Frequency.

Additionally, for unplanned events only, magnitude incorporates the ‘likelihood’ factor discussed above. Magnitude essentially describes the intensity of the change that is predicted to occur in the resource/receptor as a result of the impact. As discussed above, the magnitude designations themselves are universally consistent, but the descriptions for these designations vary on a resource/receptor-by-resource/receptor basis. The universal magnitude designations are:

Positive; Negligible; Small – Changes in ambient sound levels lower than 3 dB; Medium – Changes in ambient sound levels between 3 – 7 dBA; and Large – Changes in ambient sound levels higher than 10 dBA.

28


In the case of a positive impact, no magnitude designation (aside from ‘positive’) is assigned. It is considered sufficient for the purpose of the Impact Assessment to indicate that the Project is expected to result in a positive impact, without characterizing the exact degree of positive change likely to occur. In the case of impacts resulting from unplanned events, the same resource/receptor-specific approach to concluding a magnitude designation is utilised, but the ‘likelihood’ factor is considered, together with the other impact characteristics, when assigning a magnitude designation. In addition to characterizing the magnitude of impact, the other principal impact evaluation step is definition of the sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of the impacted resource/receptor. There are a range of factors to be taken into account when defining the sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of the resource/receptor, which may be physical, biological, cultural or human. Other factors may also be considered when characterizing sensitivity/vulnerability/importance, such as legal protection, government policy, stakeholder views and economic value. As in the case of magnitude, the sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations themselves are universally consistent, but the definitions for these designations vary on a resource/receptor b a s i s . The sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations used herein for all resources/receptors are:

Low; Medium; and High.

Once magnitude of impact and sensitivity/vulnerability/importance of resource/receptor have been characterized, the significance can be assigned for each impact. Impact significance is designated using the matrix shown in Figure 5-5.

29


Figure 5-5: Impact Significance

The matrix applies universally to all resources/receptors, and all impacts to these resources/receptors, as the resource/receptor-specific considerations are factored into the assignment of magnitude and sensitivity/vulnerability/importance designations that enter into the matrix. Box A provides a c o n t e x t for what the various impact significance ratings signify. It is important to note that impact prediction and evaluation take into account any embedded controls (i.e., physical or procedural controls that are already planned as part of the Project design, regardless of the results of the IA Process). An example of an embedded control is a standard acoustic enclosure that is designed to be installed around a piece of major equipment.

30


Box 5-1: Context of Impact Significance An impact of negligible significance is one where a resource/receptor (including people) will essentially not be affected in any way by a particular activity or the predicted effect is deemed to be ‘imperceptible’ or is indistinguishable from natural background variations. An impact of minor significance is one where a resource/receptor will experience a noticeable effect, but the impact magnitude is sufficiently small and/or the resource/receptor is of low sensitivity/ vulnerability/ importance. In either case, the magnitude should be well within applicable standards. An impact of moderate significance has an impact magnitude that is within applicable standards, but falls somewhere in the range from a threshold below which the impact is minor, up to a level that might be just short of breaching a legal limit. Clearly, to design an activity so that its effects only just avoid breaking a law and/or cause a major impact is not best practice. The emphasis for moderate impacts is therefore on demonstrating that the impact has been reduced to a level that is as low as reasonably practicable (ALARP). This does not necessarily mean that impacts of moderate significance have to be reduced to minor, but that moderate impacts are being managed effectively and efficiently. An impact of major significance is one where an accepted limit or standard may be exceeded, or large magnitude impacts occur to highly valued/sensitive resource/receptors. An aim of IA is to get to a position where the Project does not have any major residual impacts, certainly not ones that would endure into the long-term or extend over a large area. However, for some aspects there may b e major residual impacts after all practicable mitigation options have been exhausted (i.e. ALARP has been applied). An example might be the visual impact of a facility. It is then the function of regulators and stakeholders to weigh such negative factors against the positive ones, such as employment, in coming to a decision on the Project.

5.3 REPRESENTATION OF NOISE LEVELS

Noise rating levels were calculated in this report using the appropriate sound propagation models as defined. It is therefore important to understand the difference between sound or noise level as well as the noise rating level (also see Glossary of Terms, Appendix A). Sound or noise levels generally refers to a level as measured using an instrument, whereas the noise rating level refers to a calculated sound exposure level to which various corrections and adjustments were added. These noise rating levels are further processed into a 3D map, illustrating noise contours of constant rating levels or noise isopleths. In this project, it illustrates the potential extent of the calculated noises of the complete project and not noise levels at a specific moment in time.

31


6 METHODS: CALCULATION OF NOISE CLIMATE

6.1 POINT SOURCES –INFRASTRUCTURE

The noise emissions from various sources, as defined by the project, were calculated in detail for the construction and operational activities by using the sound propagation models described by SANS 10357 and ISO 9613-2 models. The following were considered:

The octave band sound pressure emission levels of processes and equipment; The distance of the receivers from the noise sources; The impact of atmospheric absorption; The meteorological conditions in terms of Pascal stability; The operational details of the proposed project, such as projected areas where activities will be taking place; Screening corrections where applicable; Topographical layout; and Acoustical characteristics of the ground.

32


7 ASSUMPTIONS AND LIMITATIONS

7.1 CALCULATING NOISE EMISSIONS – ADEQUACY OF PREDICTIVE METHODS

Limitations due to the calculations of the noise emissions into the environment include the following:

Many sound propagation models do not consider sound characteristics as calculations are based on an equivalent level (with the appropriate correction implemented e.g. tone or impulse). These other characteristics include intrusive sounds or amplitude modulation; Many sound propagation models do not accurately (or at all) calculate the increase of the ambient baseline due to wind shear (masking noise); Most sound propagation models do not consider refraction through the various temperature layers (specifically relevant during the night-times); Most sound propagation models do not consider the low frequency range (third octave 16 Hz – 31.5 Hz). This would be relevant to facilities with a potentially low frequency issues; Many environmental models consider sound to propagate in hemi-spherical way. Certain noise sources (e.g. a speakers, exhausts, fans) emit sound power levels in a directional manner; The octave sound power levels selected for processes and equipment accurately represents the sound character and power levels of processes/equipment. The determination of these levels in itself is subject to errors, limitations and assumptions with any potential errors carried over to any model making use of these results; Sound power emission levels from processes and equipment may change depending on the load the process and equipment are subject to. While the octave sound power level is the average (equivalent) result of a number of measurements, this measurement relates to a period that the process or equipment was subject to a certain load. Normally these measurements are collected when the process or equipment is under high load. The result is that measurements generally represent a worst-case scenario; As it is unknown which exact processes and equipment will be operational, modelling considers a scenario where all processes and equipment are under full load 100% of the time. The result is that projected noise levels would likely over-estimate or over-engineered sound levels; The impact of atmospheric absorption is simplified and very uniform meteorological conditions are considered. This is an over-simplification and the effect of this in terms of sound propagation modelling is difficult to quantify; Many environmental models are not highly suited for close proximity calculations; and Acoustical characteristics of the ground are over-simplified, with ground conditions accepted as uniform. Ground conditions will not be considered in this assessment.

33


Due to these assumptions, modelling generally could be out with as much as +10 dBA, although realistic values ranging from 3 dBA to less than 5 dBA are more common in practice.

7.2 ADEQUACY OF UNDERLYING ASSUMPTIONS

Noise experienced at a certain location is the cumulative result of innumerable sounds emitted and generated both far and close, each in a different time domain, each having a different spectral character at a different sound level. Each of these sounds is also affected differently by surrounding vegetation, structures and meteorological conditions that result in a total cumulative noise level represented by a few numbers on a sound level meter. As previously mentioned, it is not the purpose of noise modelling to accurately determine a likely noise level at a certain receptor, but to calculate a noise rating level that is used to identify potential issues of concern.

34


8 SCENARIO: FUTURE NOISE CLIMATE

8.1 INVESTIGATED SCENARIOS

Two scenarios are applicable, namely the closure/construction and the operations of the facility. The two phases are discussed in more detail in section 4. Day and night-time operational periods (06:00 – 22:00 and 22:00 – 06:00 respectively) were assessed, with the most relevant period when a quiet time is sought (night-time). Only a daytime construction scenario was considered. Calculations in this section are based on a worst-case scenario and are relevant at all times (not a moment in time, but the potential extent of noise rating levels during the relevant phase i.e. LReq,1hr/d/n). Modelled impact scenarios are a representation of the precautionary principle or over-engineering. Equipment assessed is based off maximum capacity Sound Power Levels (SPL) allowable from the likely noisiest point on the equipment (exhaust, engine bay etc.). Equipment assessed is from large capacity equipment i.e. large bucket specifications on a FEL or large tonnage ADT. SPL is garnered from a host of online resources and available SPL conducted by manufacturers for their equipment.

8.1.1 Investigated Construction & Operational Scenarios

The primary and secondary corrections considered for the construction and operational phases are presented in Table 8.5 with the layout presented in Figure 8-1. Table 8.5: LR,d construction scenario investigated

Intervening environmental factors Receiver(s) See layout in Figure 1-2 & Figure 8-1 Intervening ground correction Medium-hard nature (50% soft). Façade correction No.

Metrological Activities assessed functioned during wind-still conditions during good sound propagation conditions (20oC and 80% humidity).

Elevations No. Construction

Project construction equipment See Section 4.1. Operational

Project operations See Section 4.2.

35


Figure 8-1: Investigated Scenarios

36


9 MODELLING RESULTS AND IMPACT ASSESSMENT

9.1 MODELLED SCENARIOS

It should be noted that the projected noise levels represent a potential worse-case sound levels at a specific point in time, considering all the various activities simultaneously, operating at full load levels (maximum noise levels). The assessment is separated into two phases (in terms of acoustics) namely construction and the operations of the facility.

9.1.1 Construction LReq,1hr – Worst-case Maximum Noise Levels

The construction phase was assessed at two different locations, namely when construction crew may be working on either the eastern or western footprint. Only daytime construction scenarios were investigated. The outcome of the consolidated eastern and western scenarios for the construction impact assessment is presented in Table 9.6. It is further represented in Figure 9-1 and Figure 9-2, using contours of constant noise levels for the eastern and western scenarios respectively. The resulting future noise projections indicate that the construction of the project will comply with the Noise Control Regulations (GN R154), SANS 10103:2008 guideline and IFC performance standards.

9.1.2 Operational LReq,1hr – Worst-case Maximum Noise Levels

The outcome of the daytime operational impact assessment is presented in Table 9-7 for the receptors within the study area, while night-time is assessed in Table 9-8. It is further represented in Figure 9-3 and Figure 9-4 as contours of day and night-time hours respectively. The resulting future noise projections indicate that the operation of the project will comply with the Noise Control Regulations (GN R154), SANS 10103:2008 guideline and IFC performance standards.

37


Table 9.6: Impact Assessment: Daytime Construction Phase (Eastern & Western Footprint Scenarios) Construction activities may increase the ambient sound levels in the vicinity of the project during the day.

Criterion Rating Comment Nature Negative The project will result in changes in the ambient sound levels in the vicinity of project. Type Direct Construction sounds will affect the project and surrounding areas. Duration Short-term The impact will be short-term (construction phase). Extent Local The sound will be audible up to 1,000m (quiet times) from potential construction activities.

Scale Low Increases in sound levels will impact the project footprint and up to 1,000m from the construction activities. It will impact the surrounding area.

Frequency Constant Construction noises will occur as long as construction activities take place. Magnitude Negligible The change in ambient sound levels at the surrounding potential noise-sensitive receptors will be negligible.

Confidence in assessment High Considering the conceptualized construction activities, the location of the activities and the worst-case scenario as evaluated confidence levels is high.

Significance Negligible The significance of the noise impact during daytime construction activities will be negligible.

38


Figure 9-1:Projected Construction Noise Levels - Eastern Footprint

39


Figure 9-2:Projected Construction Noise Levels - Western Footprint

40


Table 9-7:Impact Assessment: Daytime Operational Phase Construction activities may increase the ambient sound levels in the vicinity of the project during the daytime.

Criterion Rating Comment Nature Negative The project will result in changes in the ambient sound levels in the vicinity of project. Type Direct Operational sounds will affect the project and surrounding areas. Duration Long-term The impact will be long-term (full operational phase). Extent Local The sound will be audible up to 1,000m (quiet times) from potential operational activities.

Scale Low Increases in sound levels will impact the project footprint and up to 1,000m from the operational activities. It will impact the surrounding area.

Frequency Constant Operational noises will occur during the life of the project. Magnitude Negligible The change in ambient sound levels at the surrounding potential noise-sensitive receptors will be negligible.

Confidence in assessment High Considering the conceptualized operational activities, the location of the activities and the worst-case scenario as evaluated confidence levels is high.

Significance Negligible The significance of the noise impact during daytime operational activities will be negligible. Table 9-8:Impact Assessment: Night-time Operational Phase

Construction activities may increase the ambient sound levels in the vicinity of the project during the night-time. Criterion Rating Comment Nature Negative The project will result in changes in the ambient sound levels in the vicinity of project. Type Direct Operational sounds will affect the project and surrounding areas. Duration Long-term The impact will be long-term (full operational phase). Extent Local The sound will be audible up to 1,000m (quiet times) from potential operational activities.

Scale Low Increases in sound levels will impact the project footprint and up to 1,000m from the operational activities. It will impact the surrounding area.

Frequency Constant Operational noises will occur during the life of the project. Magnitude Negligible The change in ambient sound levels at the surrounding potential noise-sensitive receptors will be negligible.

Confidence in assessment High Considering the conceptualized operational activities, the location of the activities and the worst-case scenario as evaluated confidence levels is high.

Significance Negligible The significance of the noise impact during night-time operational activities will be negligible.

41


Figure 9-3:Projected operational noise levels - daytime

42


Figure 9-4:Projected Operational Noise Levels – Night-time

43


10 MITIGATION OPTIONS

Based on the project outcome of the modelled scenarios in section 0 above, mitigation options are not required, however recommendations are still supplied for the developer to consider to ensure a consistent negligible significance.

10.1 CONSTRUCTION PHASE

Mitigation options are not recommended but the developer should consider the following:

Ensuring that equipment is well maintained and fitted with the correct and appropriate noise abatement measures. Acoustical mufflers (or silencers) should be considered on equipment exhausts. A noise absorption braid could be mounted on the front of heavy equipment radiators (ADT’s, FEL’s etc.) to prevent excess mechanical fan noise into the surrounding environment. Engine bay covers over heavy equipment could be pre-fitted with sound absorbing material; The development should investigate the use of white-noise generators instead of tonal reverse alarms on heavy vehicles(4). This option is highly recommended although it must be noted that reverse alarms is exempt from an acoustical assessment due to Government Notice R154 of 1992 (Noise Control Regulations) – Clause 7.(1) – “the emission of sound is for the purposes of warning people of a dangerous situation”; and It is recommended that noisy construction activities are limited to daytime hours (06:00 – 22:00) as far as is reasonably feasible.

10.2 OPERATIONAL PHASE

Mitigation options are not recommended during the operational phase. However the developer should consider management options to ensure the negligible significance, namely:

The development should investigate the use of white-noise generators instead of tonal reverse alarms on heavy vehicles. Gantries should be developed so that tanker trucks do not need to reverse on the facility (minimising reverse alarms); and The pump or pump stations should be enclosed (e.g. with galvanised sheeting) where feasibly possible.

(4) White Noise Reverse Alarms: http://www.brigade-electronics.com/products.

44


11 CONCLUSIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS

Assessments done in this document are as recommended by national and international guidelines and regulations SANS 10103, SANS 10328 and GN R154 of 1992. The report considers worst-case scenarios, evaluating the potential noise impact during peak hours. Two phases were investigated and modelled. These include the construction phase, entailing the construction of the project, and the operation of the facility itself. Considering this approach, there is a risk of a noise impact of a negligible significance during peak construction and operational noise levels. The demolition phase would have a lower noise impact than the construction phase and was not further considered. No measurement programme is recommended. It is therefore recommended that the project be authorised (from a noise impact perspective) subject to the implementation of the mitigation measures contained in this report.

45


12 THE AUTHOR

The author of this report, M. de Jager (B. Ing (Chem), UP) graduated in 1998 from the University of Pretoria. He has been interested in acoustics since school days, doing projects mainly related to loudspeaker enclosure design. Interest in the matter brought him into the field of Environmental Noise Measurement, Prediction and Control. The co-author of this report, Shaun Weinberg, has from May 2009 worked as an Environmental Consultant at the firm M2 Environmental Connections (MENCO), and then at Enviro-Acoustics Research from 2012. His environmental background includes being involved in acoustical measurements (including ETSU-R97 methodology), baseline and environmental noise impact assessments, recommended longer-term measurement plans, monitoring and auditing Reports. As from 2007 they have been involved with the following projects: Wind Energy Facilities

Zen (Savannah Environmental – SE), Goereesoe (SE), Springfontein (SE), Garob (SE), Project Blue (SE), ESKOM Kleinzee (SE), iNCa Gouda (Aurecon SA), Kangnas (Aurecon), Walker Bay (SE), Oyster Bay (SE), Hidden Valley (SE), Happy Valley (SE), Deep River (SE), Saldanha WEF (Terramanzi), Loeriesfontein (SiVEST), Noupoort (SiVEST), Prieska (SiVEST), Plateau East and West (Aurecon), Saldanha (Aurecon), Veldrift (Aurecon), Tsitsikamma (SE), AB (SE), West Coast One (SE), Namakwa Sands (SE), Dorper (SE), VentuSA Gouda (SE), Amakhala Emoyeni (SE), Klipheuwel (SE), Cookhouse (SE), Cookhouse II (SE), Canyon Springs (Canyon Springs), Rheboksfontein (SE), Suurplaat (SE), Karoo Renewables (SE), Outeniqwa (Aurecon), Koningaas (SE), Eskom Aberdene (SE), Spitskop (SE), Rhenosterberg (SiVEST), Bannf (Vidigenix), Wolf WEF (Aurecon)

Mining and Industry

BECSA – Middelburg (Golder Associates), Kromkrans Colliery (Geovicon Environmental), SASOL Borrow Pits Project (JMA Consulting), Lesego Platinum (AGES), Tweefontein Colliery (Cleanstream), Evraz Vametco Mine and Plant (JMA), Goedehoop Colliery (Geovicon), Hacra Project (Prescali Environmental), Der Brochen Platinum Project (J9 Environment), Delft Sand (AGES), Brandbach Sand (AGES), Verkeerdepan Extension (CleanStream), Dwaalboom Limestone (AGES), Jagdlust Chrome (MENCO), WPB Coal (MENCO), Landau Expansion (CleanStream), Otjikoto Gold (AurexGold), Klipfontein Colliery (MENCO), Imbabala Coal (MENCO), ATCOM East Expansion (Jones and Wagner), IPP Waterberg Power Station (SE), Kangra Coal (ERM), Schoongesicht (CleanStream), EastPlats (CleanStream), Chapudi Coal (Jacana Environmental), Generaal Coal (JE), Mopane Coal (JE), Boshoek Chrome (JMA), Langpan Chrome (PE), Vlakpoort Chrome (PE), Sekoko Coal (SE), Frankford Power (REMIG), Strahrae Coal (Ferret Mining), Transalloys Power Station (Savannah), Pan Palladum Smelter, Iron and PGM Complex (Prescali), Extensions of the Rietspruit Crushers (Gudani Consulting), Proposed Colenso Coal Fired Power Station and Coal Mine (SiVEST), Development of the proposed Fumani Mine(AGES)

Road and Railway

K220 Road Extension (Urbansmart), Boskop Road (MTO), Sekoko Mining (AGES), Davel-Swaziland-Richards Bay Rail Link (Aurecon), Moloto Transport Corridor Status Quo Report and Pre-Feasibility (SiVEST), Postmasburg Housing Development (SE), Tshwane Rapid Transport Project, Phase 1 and 2 (NRM Consulting/City of Tshwane), Swaziland Rail Link – Assessment of 4 Schools in Swaziland (Aurecon), Extension of Atterbury Road, City of Tshwane (Bokomoso)

Airport Oudtshoorn Noise Monitoring (AGES), Sandton Heliport (Alpine Aviation), Tete Airport Scoping

46


Noise monitoring Peerboom Colliery (EcoPartners), Thabametsi (Digby Wells), Doxa Deo (Doxa Deo),

Harties Dredging (Rand Water), Xstrata Coal – Witbank Regional, Sephaku Delmas (AGES), Amakhala Emoyeni WEF (Windlab Developments), Oyster Bay WEF (Renewable Energy Systems), Tsitsikamma WEF (Cennergi and SE), Hopefield WEF (Umoya), Wesley WEF (Innowind), Ncora WEF (Innowind), Boschmanspoort (Jones and Wagner), Nqamakwe WEF (Innowind), Dassiesfontein WEF Noise Analysis (BioTherm), Transnet Noise Analysis (Aurecon), Unica Iron and Steels’s Babelgi Plant Operations (Unica), Sephaku Cement Aganang Quarterly Monitoring Report (Exigo), Sephaku Cement Delmas Quarterly Monitoring Report (Exigo)

Small Noise Impact Assessments

TCTA AMD Project Baseline (AECOM), NATREF (Nemai Consulting), Christian Life Church (UrbanSmart), Kosmosdale (UrbanSmart), Louwlardia K220 (UrbanSmart), Richards Bay Port Expansion (AECOM), Babalegi Steel Recycling (AGES), Safika Slag Milling Plant (AGES), Arcelor Mittal WEF (Aurecon), RVM Hydroplant (Aurecon), Grootvlei PS Oil Storage (SiVEST), Rhenosterberg WEF, (SiVEST), Concerto Estate (BPTrust), Ekuseni Youth Centre (MENCO), Kranskop Industrial Park (Cape South Developments), Pretoria Central Mosque (Noman Shaikh), Soshanguve Development (Maluleke Investments), Seshego-D Waste Disposal (Enviroxcellence), Zambesi Safari Equipment (Owner), Noise Annoyance Assessment due to the Operation of the Gautrain (Thornhill and Lakeside Residential Estate), Upington Solar (SE), Ilangalethu Solar (SE), Pofadder Solar (SE), Flagging Trees WEF (SE), Uyekraal WEF (SE), Ruuki Power Station (SE), Richards Bay Port Expansion (AECOM), Babalegi Steel Recycling (AGES), Safika Ladium (AGES), Safika Cement Isando (AGES), Natref (NEMAI), RareCo (SE), Struisbaai WEF (SE), uMzimkhulu Landfill Site (Nzingwe Consultancy), Proposed Linksfield Residential Development (Bokomoso)

Project reviews and amendment reports

Loperberg (Savannah), Dorper (Savannah), Penhoek Pass (Savannah), Oyster Bay (RES), Tsitsikamma (Cennergi), Amakhala Emoyeni (Windlab), Spreeukloof (Savannah), Spinning Head (Savannah), Kangra Coal (ERM), West Coast One (Moyeng Energy), Rheboksfontein (Moyeng Energy)

47


13 REFERENCES

In this report reference was made to the following documentation: Almgren, Martin, 2011: Presentation – Impressions of Wind Turbine Noise: Rome 11 – 14 April 2014. Autumn, Lyn Radle. 2007. The effect of noise on Wildlife: A literature review. Ann Linda Baldwin. 2007. Effect of Noise on Rodent Physiology. Brüel & Kjær. 2007. Investigation of Tonal Noise. Colin O’Donnell, Jane Sedgeley. 1994. An Automatic Monitoring System for Recording Bat Activity. 5th ed. Department of Conservation. Committee of Transport Officials. 2012. TRH 26, South African Road Classification and Access Management Manual. Version 1.0.2012. Everest and Pohlmann. 2009. Master Handbook of Acoustics. Fifth Edition. European Commission. 1996. European Commission Green Paper – Future Noise Policy. (Com (96) 540). European Environmental Agency, 2010. Good practice guideline on noise exposure and potential health effects. EEA Technical report, No. 11/2010, Copenhagen. Environment & We an International Journal of Science & Technology. “2001. Ambient noise levels due to dawn chorus at different habitats in Delhi. Pg. 134. Department of Transport. 1988. Calculation of Road Traffic Noise. D B Stephens and R d Rader. 1983. Effects of Vibration, Noise and Restraint on Heart Rate, Blood Pressure and Renal Blood Flow in the Pig. Department of Physiology and Biophysics University of Southern California Equipment list and Sound Power Level source: http://www.fhwa.dot.gov/environment/noise/construction_noise/handbook/handbook09.cfm. H.C Bennet-Clark. 1994. The Scaling of Song Frequency in Cicadas. The Company of Biologist Limited. International Finance Corporation. 2007. General EHS Guidelines – Environmental Noise Management. International council of Mining & Metals. 2006. Good Practice Guidance for Mining and Biodiversity. Pg. 63. International Organisation for Standardisation. 2002. ISO 13473-2:2002. Characterization of pavement texture by use of surface profiles — Part 2: Terminology and basic requirements related to pavement texture profile analysis. International Organisation for Standardisation. 1996. ISO 9613-2. Acoustics – Attenuation of sound during outdoors - Part 2: General method of calculation. Janssen, S.A., Vos, H., 2009. A comparison of recent surveys to aircraft noise exposure-response relationships. TNO, Delft. J.C. Hartley. 1991. Can Bush Crickets Discriminate Frequency? University of Nottingham.

48


Milieu. 2010. Inventory of Potential Measures for a Better Control of Environmental Noise. DG Environment of the European Commission. Musina L. & Rutherford. 2006. The vegetation of South Africa, Lesotho and Swaziland. Strelitzia 19, South African National Biodiversity Institute, Pretoria. National Park Services. 2000. Soundscape Preservation and Noise Management. Pg. 1. Norton, M.P. and Karczub, D.G. 2003. Fundamentals of Noise and Vibration Analysis for Engineers. Kjær Second Edition. South Africa. 1996. National Road Traffic Act, 1996 (Act No. 93 of 1996). Panatcha Anusasananan, Suksan Suwanarat, & Nipon Thangprasert. 2012. Acoustic Characteristics of Zebra Dove in Thailand. Pg. 4. South African National Standards. 2004b. SANS 10357:2004. The calculation of sound propagation by the Concave method. South African National Standards. 2005. SANS 9614-3:2005. Determination of sound power levels of noise sources using sound intensity – Part 3: Precision method for measurement by scanning. South African National Standards. 2008a. SANS 10103:2008. The measurement and rating of environmental noise with respect to annoyance and to speech communication. South African National Standards. 2008b. SANS 10328:2008. Methods for environmental noise impact assessments. South African Water Research Commission. 2009. Water Resources of South Africa (WR2005). WRC Report No.: K5/1491. South Africa: WRC Publications. Van Riet, W. Claassen, P. van Rensburg, J. van Viegen and L. du Plessis. 1998. Environmental potential atlas for South Africa. Pretoria. World Health Organization. 1999. Protection of the Human Environment. Guidelines for Community Noise. World Health Organization. 2009. Night Noise Guidelines for Europe. Wei, B. L. 1969. Physiological effects of audible sound. AAAS Symposium Science, 166(3904). 533-535.

49


APPENDIX A Glossary of Acoustic Terms, Definitions and

General Information

Appendix A: Acoustic Terms, Definitions and General Information


1/3-Octave Band A filter with a bandwidth of one-third of an octave representing four semitones, or notes on the musical scale. This relationship is applied to both the width of the band, and the centre frequency of the band. See also definition of octave band.

A – Weighting

An internationally standardised frequency weighting that approximates the frequency response of the human ear and gives an objective reading that therefore agrees with the subjective human response to that sound.

Air Absorption The phenomena of attenuation of sound waves with distance propagated in air, due to dissipative interaction within the gas molecules.

Alternatives A possible course of action, in place of another, that would meet the same purpose and need (of proposal). Alternatives can refer to any of the following, but are not limited hereto: alternative sites for development, alternative site layouts, alternative designs, alternative processes and materials. In Integrated Environmental Management the so-called “no go” alternative refers to the option of not allowing the development and may also require investigation in certain circumstances.

Ambient The conditions surrounding an organism or area. Ambient Noise The all-encompassing sound at a point being composed of sounds from many sources both

near and far. It includes the noise from the noise source under investigation. Ambient Sound The all-encompassing sound at a point being composite of sounds from near and far. Ambient Sound Level

Means the reading on an integrating impulse sound level meter taken at a measuring point in the absence of any alleged disturbing noise at the end of a total period of at least 10 minutes after such a meter was put into operation. In this report the term Background Ambient Sound Level will be used.

Amplitude Modulated Sound

A sound that noticeably fluctuates in loudness over time.

Anthropogenic Human impact on the environment or anthropogenic impact on the environment includes impacts on biophysical environments, biodiversity and other resources

Applicant Any person who applies for an authorisation to undertake a listed activity or to cause such activity in terms of the relevant environmental legislation.

Assessment The process of collecting, organising, analysing, interpreting and communicating data that is relevant to some decision.

Attenuation Term used to indicate reduction of noise or vibration, by whatever method necessary, usually expressed in decibels.

Audible frequency Range

Generally assumed to be the range from about 20 Hz to 20,000 Hz, the range of frequencies that our ears perceive as sound.

Ambient Sound Level

The level of the ambient sound indicated on a sound level meter in the absence of the sound under investigation (e.g. sound from a particular noise source or sound generated for test purposes). Ambient sound level as per Noise Control Regulations.

Axle Shaft connecting two wheels on either side of the vehicle. The wheels are forced to rotate at the same speed. Vehicles with independent wheels have ‘stub axles’ that do not connect the two wheels on either side of the vehicle.

Ballast A layer of coarse stones supporting the sleepers. Baseplate A track component designed to hold the rail in place, usually with resilience to provide

improved vibration isolation. Broadband Noise Spectrum consisting of a large number of frequency components, none of which is

individually dominant.

C-Weighting This is an international standard filter, which can be applied to a pressure signal or to a SPL or PWL spectrum, and which is essentially a pass-band filter in the frequency range of approximately 63 to 4000 Hz. This filter provides a more constant, flatter, frequency response, providing significantly less adjustment than the A-scale filter for frequencies less than 1000 Hz.

dB(A) Sound Pressure Level in decibel that has been A-weighted, or filtered, to match the response of the human ear.

Decibel (db) A logarithmic scale for sound corresponding to a multiple of 10 of the threshold of

Pa. Diffraction The process whereby an acoustic wave is disturbed and its energy redistributed in space as

a result of an obstacle in its path, Reflection and refraction are special cases of diffraction. Direction of Propagation

The direction of flow of energy associated with a wave.



Disturbing noise Means a noise level that exceeds the zone sound level or, if no zone sound level has been designated, a noise level that exceeds the ambient sound level at the same measuring point by 7 dBA or more.

Echolocation Echo locating animals emit calls out to the environment and listen to the echoes of those calls that return from various objects near them. They use these echoes to locate and identify the objects. Echolocation is used for navigation and for foraging (or hunting) in various environments.

Environment The external circumstances, conditions and objects that affect the existence and development of an individual, organism or group; these circumstances include biophysical, social, economic, historical, cultural and political aspects.

Environmental Control Officer

Independent Officer employed by the applicant to ensure the implementation of the Environmental Management Plan (EMP) and manages any further environmental issues that may arise.

Environmental impact

A change resulting from the effect of an activity on the environment, whether desirable or undesirable. Impacts may be the direct consequence of an organisation’s activities or may be indirectly caused by them.

Environmental Impact Assessment

An Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) refers to the process of identifying, predicting and assessing the potential positive and negative social, economic and biophysical impacts of any proposed project, plan, programme or policy that requires authorisation of permission by law and that may significantly affect the environment. The EIA includes an evaluation of alternatives, as well as recommendations for appropriate mitigation measures for minimising or avoiding negative impacts, measures for enhancing the positive aspects of the proposal, and environmental management and monitoring measures.

Environmental issue

A concern felt by one or more parties about some existing, potential or perceived environmental impact.

Equivalent continuous A-weighted sound exposure level (LAeq,T)

The value of the average A-weighted sound pressure level measured continuously within a reference time interval T, which have the same mean-square sound pressure as a sound under consideration for which the level varies with time.

Equivalent continuous A-weighted rating level (LReq,T)

The Equivalent continuous A-weighted sound exposure level (LAeq,T) to which various adjustments has been added. More commonly used as (LReq,d) over a time interval 06:00 – 22:00 (T=16 hours) and (LReq,n) over a time interval of 22:00 – 06:00 (T=8 hours). It is a calculated value.

F (fast) time weighting

(1) Averaging detection time used in sound level meters. (2) Fast setting has a time constant of 125 milliseconds and provides a fast reacting display response allowing the user to follow and measure not too rapidly fluctuating sound.

Footprint area Area to be used for the construction of the proposed development, which does not include the total study area.

Free Field Condition

An environment where there is no reflective surfaces.

Frequency The rate of oscillation of a sound, measured in units of Hertz (Hz) or kiloHertz (kHz). One hundred Hz is a rate of one hundred times per second. The frequency of a sound is the property perceived as pitch: a low-frequency sound (such as a bass note) oscillates at a relatively slow rate, and a high-frequency sound (such as a treble note) oscillates at a relatively high rate.

Green field A parcel of land not previously developed beyond that of agriculture or forestry use; virgin land. The opposite of Greenfield is Brownfield, which is a site previously developed and used by an enterprise, especially for a manufacturing or processing operation. The term Brownfield suggests that an investigation should be made to determine if environmental damage exist.

Grinding A process for removing a thin layer of metal from the top of the rail head in order to remove roughness and/or to restore the correct profile. Special grinding trains are used for this.

G-Weighting An International Standard filter used to represent the infrasonic components of a sound spectrum.

Harmonics Any of a series of musical tones for which the frequencies are integral multiples of the



frequency of a fundamental tone.

I (impulse) time weighting

(1) Averaging detection time used in sound level meters as per South African standards and Regulations. (2) Impulse setting has a time constant of 35 milliseconds when the signal is increasing (sound pressure level rising) and a time constant of 1,500 milliseconds while the signal is decreasing.

Impulsive sound A sound characterized by brief excursions of sound pressure (transient signal) that significantly exceed the ambient sound level.

Infrasound Sound with a frequency content below the threshold of hearing, generally held to be about 20 Hz. Infrasonic sound with sufficiently large amplitude can be perceived, and is both heard and felt as vibration. Natural sources of infrasound are waves, thunder and wind.

Integrated Development Plan

A participatory planning process aimed at developing a strategic development plan to guide and inform all planning, budgeting, management and decision-making in a Local Authority, in terms of the requirements of Chapter 5 of the Municipal Systems Act, 2000 (Act 32 of 2000).

Integrated Environmental Management

IEM provides an integrated approach for environmental assessment, management, and decision-making and to promote sustainable development and the equitable use of resources. Principles underlying IEM provide for a democratic, participatory, holistic, sustainable, equitable and accountable approach.

Interested and affected parties

Individuals or groups concerned with or affected by an activity and its consequences. These include the authorities, local communities, investors, work force, consumers, environmental interest groups and the general public.

Interburden Material of any nature that lies between two or more bedded ore zones or coal seams. Term is primarily used in surface mining

Joint rail A connection between two lengths of rail, often held together by an arrangement of bolts and fishplates.

Key issue An issue raised during the Scoping process that has not received an adequate response and that requires further investigation before it can be resolved.

Listed activities Development actions that is likely to result in significant environmental impacts as identified by the delegated authority (formerly the Minister of Environmental Affairs and Tourism) in terms of Section 21 of the Environment Conservation Act.

Locomotive A powered vehicle used to draw or propel a train of carriages or wagons (as opposed to a multiple unit).

LAMin and LAMax Is the RMS (root mean squared) minimum or maximum level of a noise source. Loudness The attribute of an auditory sensation that describes the listener's ranking of sound in

terms of its audibility. Magnitude of impact

Magnitude of impact means the combination of the intensity, duration and extent of an impact occurring.

Masking The raising of a listener's threshold of hearing for a given sound due to the presence of another sound.

Mitigation To cause to become less harsh or hostile.

Natural Sounds Are sounds produced by natural sources in their normal soundscape. Negative impact A change that reduces the quality of the environment (for example, by reducing species

diversity and the reproductive capacity of the ecosystem, by damaging health, or by causing nuisance).

Noise a. Sound that a listener does not wish to hear (unwanted sounds). b. Sound from sources other than the one emitting the sound it is desired to receive, measure or record. c. A class of sound of an erratic, intermittent or statistically random nature.

Noise Level The term used in lieu of sound level when the sound concerned is being measured or ranked for its undesirability in the contextual circumstances.

Noise-sensitive development

developments that could be influenced by noise such as: a) districts (see table 2 of SANS 10103:2008)

rural districts, suburban districts with little road traffic, urban districts, urban districts with some workshops, with business premises, and with main roads, central business districts, and



industrial districts; b) educational, residential, office and health care buildings and their surroundings; c) churches and their surroundings; d) auditoriums and concert halls and their surroundings; e) recreational areas; and f) nature reserves. In this report Noise-sensitive developments is also referred to as a Potential Sensitive Receptor

Octave Band A filter with a bandwidth of one octave, or twelve semi-tones on the musical scale representing a doubling of frequency.

Overburden In mining and in archaeology, overburden (also called waste or spoil) is the material that lies above an area of economic or scientific interest. In mining, it is most commonly the rock, soil, and ecosystem that lies above a coal seam or ore body

Positive impact A change that improves the quality of life of affected people or the quality of the environment.

Property Any piece of land indicated on a diagram or general plan approved by the Surveyor-General intended for registration as a separate unit in terms of the Deeds Registries Act and includes an erf, a site and a farm portion as well as the buildings erected thereon

Public Participation Process

A process of involving the public in order to identify needs, address concerns, choose options, plan and monitor in terms of a proposed project, programme or development

Reflection Redirection of sound waves. Refraction Change in direction of sound waves caused by changes in the sound wave velocity,

typically when sound wave propagates in a medium of different density. Reverberant Sound

The sound in an enclosure which results from repeated reflections from the boundaries.

Reverberation The persistence, after emission of a sound has stopped, of a sound field within an enclosure.

Rail head The bulbous part at the top of the rail. Rolling Stock Rolling stock comprises all the vehicles that move on a railway. It usually includes both

powered and unpowered vehicles, for example locomotives, railroad cars, coaches, and wagons.

ROM The coal delivered from the mine that reports to the coal preparation plant is called run-of-mine, or ROM, coal. This is the raw material for the CPP, and consists of coal, rocks, middlings, minerals and contamination

Shunting Shunting, in railway operations, is the process of sorting items of rolling stock into complete train sets.

Railway Sidings A siding, in rail terminology, is a low-speed track section distinct from a running line or through route such as a main line or branch line or spur. It may connect to through track or to other sidings at either end.

Significant Impact

An impact can be deemed significant if consultation with the relevant authorities and other interested and affected parties, on the context and intensity of its effects, provides reasonable grounds for mitigating measures to be included in the environmental management report. The onus will be on the applicant to include the relevant authorities and other interested and affected parties in the consultation process. Present and potential future, cumulative and synergistic effects should all be taken into account.

S (slow) time weighting

(1) Averaging times used in sound level meters. (2) Time constant of one [1] second that gives a slower response which helps average out the display fluctuations.

Sound Level The level of the frequency and time weighted sound pressure as determined by a sound level meter, i.e. A-weighted sound level.

Sound Power Of a source, the total sound energy radiated per unit time. Sound Pressure Level (SPL)

Of a sound, 20 times the logarithm to the base 10 of the ratio of the RMS sound pressure level to the reference sound pressure level. International values for the reference sound pressure level are 20 micropascals in air and 100 millipascals in water. SPL is reported as Lp in dB (not weighted) or in various other weightings.

Soundscape Sound or a combination of sounds that forms or arises from an immersive environment. The study of soundscape is the subject of acoustic ecology. The idea of soundscape refers to both the natural acoustic environment, consisting of natural sounds, including animal vocalizations and, for instance, the sounds of weather and other natural elements; and environmental sounds created by humans, through musical composition, sound design,



and other ordinary human activities including conversation, work, and sounds of mechanical origin resulting from use of industrial technology. The disruption of these acoustic environments results in noise pollution.

Study area Refers to the entire study area encompassing all the alternative routes as indicated on the study area map.

Sustainable Development

Development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. It contains within it two key concepts: the concept of "needs", in particular the essential needs of the world's poor, to which overriding priority should be given; and the idea of limitations imposed by the state of technology and social organization on the environment's ability to meet present and the future needs (Brundtland Commission, 1987).

Timbre Timbre (also known as tone colour or tone quality) is the quality of the sound made by a particular voice or musical instrument.

Tread braked The traditional form of wheel brake consisting of a block of friction material (which could be cast iron, wood or nowadays a composition material) hung from a lever and being pressed against the wheel tread by air pressure (in the air brake) or atmospheric pressure in the case of the vacuum brake.

Tone Noise can be described as tonal if it contains a noticeable or discrete, continuous note. This includes noises such as hums, hisses, screeches, drones, etc. and any such subjective description is open to discussion and contradiction when reported.

Wagon A freight-carrying vehicle.

Zone of Potential Influence

The area defined as the radius about an object, or objects beyond which the noise impact will be insignificant.

Zone Sound Level Means a derived dBA value determined indirectly by means of a series of measurements, calculations or table readings and designated by a local authority for an area. This is similar to the Rating Level as defined in SANS 10103:2008.

End or Report


Annex D3

Fire Risk Assessment

P O Box 2541, Cresta, 2118

Tel: +27 (0) 11 431 2198 Cell: +27 (0) 82 457 3258

Fax: +27 (0) 86 624 9423

Email: [email protected]

PROJECT DONE ON BEHALF OF KANTEY & TEMPLER CONSULTING ENGINEERS

FIRE RISK ASSESSMENT FOR THE GROWTH 4 EXPANSION OF THE VOPAK FAREWELL SITE AT

ISLAND VIEW, DURBAN

Author: M P Oberholzer Date of Issue: 16rd of June 2016

Report No.: R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0

DOCUMENT CHANGE HISTORY PAGE/LINE CHANGE DATE REV Document Initial release 16 June 2016 0

COPYRIGHT WARNING All content included in this document is the property of RISCOM (PTY) LTD and is

protected by South African and international copyright laws. The collection, arrangement and assembly of all content of this document is the exclusive property of RISCOM (PTY) LTD and protected by South African and international copyright laws.

Any unauthorised copying, reproduction, distribution, publication, display, performance, modification or exploitation of copyrighted material is prohibited by law. This report may only be copied for legal notification as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act 85 of 1993, Major Hazard Installation regulations, or any local

government bylaws. Should the report be copied or printed, it must be done so in full to comply with SANAS accreditation requirements (ISO/IEC 17020:2012).

DISCLAIMER This report was prepared by RISCOM (PTY) LTD. The material in it reflects the best

judgement of RISCOM (PTY) LTD in light of the information available to it at the time of preparation. Any use that a third party makes of this report, or any reliance on or

decisions to be based on it, are the responsibility of such third parties. RISCOM (PTY) LTD accepts no responsibility for damages, if any, suffered by any

third party as a result of decisions made or actions based on this report.

RISCOM (PTY) LTD

RISCOM (PTY) LTD is a consulting company that specialises in process safety. Further to this, RISCOM* is an approved inspection authority (AIA) for conducting Major Hazard Installation (MHI) risk assessments in accordance with the OHS Act 85 of 1993 and its Major Hazard Installation regulations (July 2001). In order to maintain the status of approved inspection authority, RISCOM is accredited by the South African National Accreditation System (SANAS) in accordance with the IEC/ISO 17020:2012 standard. The accreditation consists of a number of elements, including technical competence and third party independence. The independence of RISCOM is demonstrated by the following:

RISCOM does not sell or repair equipment that can be used in the process industry; RISCOM does not have any shareholding in processing companies nor companies

performing risk assessment functions; RISCOM does not design equipment or processes.

Mike Oberholzer is a professional engineer, holds a Bachelor of Science in Chemical Engineering and is an approved signatory for MHI risk assessments, thereby meeting the competency requirements of SANAS for assessment of the risks of hazardous components, including fires, explosions and toxic releases.

M P Oberholzer Pr. Eng. BSc (Chem. Eng.) MIChemE MSAIChE

* RISCOM™ and the RISCOM logo are trademarks of RISCOM (PTY) LTD

FIRE RISK ASSESSMENT FOR THE GROWTH 4 EXPANSION OF THE VOPAK FAREWELL SITE AT ISLAND VIEW, DURBAN

© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page i


ISLAND VIEW, DURBAN

EXECUTIVE SUMMARY 1 INTRODUCTION Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Vopak) owns and operates three separate facilities in the vicinity of the Island View complex. This report focuses on the fire risk assessment for the Growth 4 Project at the Farewell-King site that has its physical address at 105 Taiwan Road in Island View. The intent of this risk assessment is to supply sufficient detail to complete a fire design suitable for the proposed fuel tanks, as part of the Growth 4 Project. The risk assessment was done in accordance to the Occupational Health and Safety Act (85 of 1993) and its Major Hazard Installation Regulation, but limited to the proposed installation of fuel tanks as outlined in the Growth 4 Project. The remainder of the site has been excluded from this study and thus this report may not be suitable for submission as a Major Hazardous Installation Risk Assessment. 1.1 Terms of Reference The main aim of the investigation was to supply enough information for the development of a firefighting system to adequately deal with the risk posed from the proposed project. This risk assessment was conducted in accordance with the Major Hazard Installation regulations. The scope of the risk assessment for the new fuel tanks included: 1. The development of accidental spill and fire scenarios for the storage facility; 2. Using generic failure rate data (tanks, pumps, valves, flanges, pipework, gantry,

couplings, etc.), the determination of the probability of each accident scenario; 3. For each incident developed in Step 2, the determination of the consequences

(thermal radiation, domino effects, toxic-cloud formation, etc.); 4. The calculation of maximum individual risk (MIR), taking into account all accidents,

meteorological conditions and lethality; 5. The inclusion of an assessment of the adequacy of emergency-response

programmes, fire prevention and fire-fighting measures. The risk assessment is not an environmental risk assessment and may not comply with requirements outside of the OHS Act or its MHI regulations. The risk assessment excluded the existing tanks and bunds, gantries, pumps and hose exchanges, offices, laboratories and workshops


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page ii

1.2 Purpose and Main Activities The Vopak site is used exclusively for the storage and distribution of a variety of commodity chemicals and fuels. Most of the chemicals and fuels are received and dispatched in bulk to or from ships, rail cars and road tankers. No chemical or fuel processing is conducted on site; however, facilities exist to decant bulk materials into drums according to market demands. 1.3 Main Hazard Due to Substance and Process The main hazards that would occur with a loss of containment of hazardous components at the Vopak site include:

Thermal radiation from fires; Overpressure from explosions.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page iii

2 ENVIRONMENT The Vopak site is located at 105 Taiwan Road in Island View., as shown in Figure 2-1, and occupies Lot 112, Lot 113 and Lot 114B of Fynnland, Island View. The site is located less than 5 m above mean sea level within Island View as part of the Durban harbour on the east coast of South Africa. Island View forms part of the greater South Durban Industrial Basin, which runs parallel to the relatively warm Indian Ocean. A bluff of approximately 80–100 m in height separates the South Durban Industrial Basin from the coastline. The land-sea interface and the peculiar topographical features have an influence on air dispersion in the region. Land use in the surrounding area of the Vopak terminal is a mixture of residential and industrial. Heavy industry dominates the immediate vicinity, including tank terminals, blending plants and shipping terminals, some of which belong to companies such as Sasol, Transnet, Engen and Island View Storage (IVS). The central business district of Durban is situated to the north of site across the Durban harbour. The closest residential areas are Fynnland, the Bluff, Ocean View and Grosvenor located to the south and Clairwood to the southwest. The Fynnland residential area is located less than 1.0 km from site.

Figure 2-1: Location of the VopakVopak site at Island View, Durban


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page iv

Information of companies neighbouring Vopak and their classification as MHIs can be seen in Figure 2-2. The following neighbouring facilities have made themselves known to Vopak as MHIs: Nalco’s, IVS and Transnet NMPP.

No. Company Name MHI 1 Sasol Nalco’s Yes 2 Island View Storage (IVS) Yes 3 Transnet New Multi-Product Pipeline (NMPP) Yes 4 Transnet New Multi-Product Pipeline (NMPP) Yes 5 H&R Wax No 6 Engen Unknown

Figure 2-2: List of neighbouring facilities and their MHI classification


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page v

3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION 3.1 Site The Vopak site occupies Lot 112, Lot 113 and Lot 114B of Fynnland in Island View. As illustrated in Figure 3-1, the site is bounded by Abadan Road to the north, Taiwan Road to the east, and Trinidad Road to South. Lot 113 is shared between Farewell and H&R Waxes (located south of the site). Lot 114A, located to the west of the site, is occupied by IVS.

No. Description No. Description 1 Offices 2 Road gantries 3 Road gantry (acrylonitrile; ACN) 4 Rail gantries 5 H&R Wax 6 Main gate 7 Diesel or unleaded petrol tanks

Figure 3-1: Layout of the Vopak facility The main entrance to the site is on Taiwan Road. It is through this entrance that most of the road tankers pass to either load or dispatch chemicals. The rail traffic enters from the northern part of the site to the rail loading gantries. The offices and control room are located on the north eastern corner along Abadan Road. The remainder of site south of the offices and road and rail gantries is occupied by about 90 bulk storage tanks ranging in size from 50 m3 to 5206 m3. These tanks are located into various bunds in a grid formation separated by roads.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page vi

3.2 Process Description The terminal is designed to receive, store and dispatch a variety of commodity bulk liquid chemicals. Receipts and dispatches are very flexible in type i.e. material can be delivered to site by ship, rail or road and pumped to the desired tanks. Likewise, the products stored in the tanks can either be decanted into 200 litre drums or dispatched in bulk via ships, rail or road.

All the atmospheric tanks located on site are vertical, fixed-roof atmospheric tanks designed to API 650 or API 620. The tanks are protected with either free venting or pressure or vacuum vents, depending on the tank design. Some tanks have the facility to insert a nitrogen blanket over flammable materials to reduce the risk of combustion. Certain tanks are vented to the atmosphere via scrubbers to reduce offensive odours and exposure to potentially toxic fumes. All other tanks would have two independent level transmitters with alarms that indicate high level as well as an independent level switch that would close the incoming valve, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2: Typical tank overfill configuration showing two independent level

transmitters and a level switch


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page vii

The connecting of the various tanks and pumps are achieved by hose exchanges where non-permanent pipe spools or hoses are manually connected in order to line up the tanks prior to pumping. These hose exchange areas are located in bunded areas to catch any spillage.

The rail and road loading are performed at dedicated unloading or loading gantries. Some unloading or loading gantries are equipped with vapour return lines (mostly where toxic components are loaded). The loading of the rail and road cars is controlled manually, while the loading of acrylonitrile (ACN) is done via a dedicated batching system that would close the supply vales when a high level is detected in the rail tankers. Gas detection and emergency stops are also present at the gantry that will shut down the supply pumps under emergency conditions. Bulk chemicals can be decanted into drums at the drum loading facilities as needed. Thereafter, the drums are temporarily stored in a drum area (with containment) and then are dispatched as soon as possible. 3.2.1 Storage Tank Safety Features Procedures and checklists are in place and are used in the day-to-day safe operation of the facility. 3.2.1.1 Engineering Controls The engineering design features present that reduce risks are as follows:

All tanks are earthed; Most tanks containing materials of a low flashpoint, other than acrylates, have

nitrogen blanketing to reduce the risks of ignition: Some tank vents are connected to permanent scrubbers to limit offensive odours and

toxic fumes venting into the atmosphere; Some tanks return vapours to the offloading ship, road and rail cars; The entire Farewell-King site (excluding offices) has an electrical area classification of

Zone 1; Tanks have overfilling protection.

3.2.1.2 Protective Systems The protective features of the storage facility include:

All tanks are bunded: o All spills would be contained within the bunded area;

Each tank has fixed water spray rings that spray cooling water onto the tank shell in the event of a fire;

Each bund has a fixed foam system; Some of the newer tanks are equipped with foam injection devices to douse fires in

individual tanks; Acrylonitrile road tanker filling points are protected with a spray tunnel; The pump bays are protected by water sprays.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page viii

3.3 Changes from Previous MHI Risk Assessment The changes to the site according to the Growth 4 Project and taken account of in this risk assessment include:

Tanks: o The Farewell bunds 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B and 2C are to be demolished and

replaced with 6 x 20 000 m3 and 6 x 5 000 m3 storage tanks containing either petrol of diesel (see Figure 3-3);

o Nine existing tanks at Farewell site would be demolished and replaced with Road-loading facilities:

o No changes; Rail-loading facilities:

o No changes.

Figure 3-3: Summary of the Terminal Efficiency Project changes at the Farewell-

King site


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page ix

3.4 Summary of Bulk Materials to be Stored on Site A summary of bulk materials forming part of the proposed project are given in Table 3-1 . Table 3-1: Summary of hazardous components to be stored on the Farewell site

Tank No. Product Tank Type

Tank Height

(m)

Tank Diameter

(m)

Tank Volume

(m3) T075 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000

T076 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T077 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T078 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T079 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T080 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T081 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T082 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T083 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T084 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T085 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T086 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page x

4 METHODOLOGY The first step in any risk assessment is to identify all hazards. The merit of including a hazard for further investigation is then determined by how significant it is, normally by using a cut-off or threshold value. Once a hazard has been identified, it is necessary to assess it in terms of the risk it presents to the employees and the neighbouring community. In principle, both probability and consequence should be considered but there are occasions where, if either the probability or the consequence can be shown to be sufficiently low or sufficiently high, decisions can be made based on just one factor. During the hazard identification component of the report, the following considerations are taken into account:

Chemical identities; Location of on-site installations that use, produce, process, transport or store

hazardous components; The type and design of containers, vessels or pipelines; The quantity of material that could be involved in an airborne release; The nature of the hazard most likely to accompany hazardous materials spills or

releases, e.g. airborne toxic vapours or mists, fires or explosions, large quantities in storage and certain handling conditions of processed components.

The evaluation methodology assumes that the facility will perform as designed in the absence of unintended events such as component and material failures of equipment, human errors, external events and process unknowns. Due to the absence of South African legislation regarding determination methodology for quantitative risk assessment (QRA), the methodology of this assessment is based on the legal requirements of the Netherlands, outlined in CPR 18E (Purple Book) and RIVM (2009). The evaluation of the acceptability of the risks is done in accordance with the Health and Safety Executive (HSE; UK) ALARP criteria, which clearly covers land use, based on the determined risks.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xi

The QRA process is summarised with the following steps: 1. The identification of components that are flammable, toxic, reactive or corrosive and

that have the potential to result in a major incident from fires, explosions or toxic releases;

2. The development of accidental loss-of-containment scenarios for equipment containing hazardous components (including the release rate, location and orientation of release);

3. For each incident developed in Step 2, the determination of the consequences (thermal radiation, domino effects, toxic-cloud formation, etc.);

4. For scenarios with off-site consequences (i.e. greater than 1% fatality off-site), the calculation of the maximum individual risk (MIR), taking into account all generic failure rates, initiating events (such as ignition), meteorological conditions and lethality.

Scenarios included in this QRA have impacts external to the establishment. The 1% fatality from acute affects (thermal radiation, blast overpressure and toxic exposure) is determined as the endpoint (RIVM 2009). Thus, a scenario producing a fatality of less than 1% at the establishment boundary under worst-case meteorological conditions is excluded from the QRA.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xii

5 CONCLUSIONS Risk calculations are not precise. The accuracy of the predictions is determined by the quality of base data and expert judgements. A number of well-known sources of incident data were consulted and applied to obtain the likelihood of an incident to occur. The risk assessment included the consequences of fires and explosions at the Vopak facility in Island View. The risk assessment was done on the assumption that the site is maintained to an acceptable level and that all statuary regulations are applied. It was also assumed that the detailed engineering designs were done by competent people and are correctly specified for the intended duty. For example, it is assumed that the tank wall thicknesses have been correctly calculated, that the vents have been sized for emergency conditions, that the instrumentation and electrical components comply with the specified electrical area classification, that the material of construction is compatible with the products, etc. It is the responsibility of Vopak and their contractors to ensure that all engineering designs have been completed by competent persons and that all equipment has been installed correctly. All designs should be in full compliance (but not limited) to the Occupational Health and Safety Act 85 of 1993 and its regulations, the National Buildings Regulations and the Buildings Standards Act 107 of 1977 as well as local bylaws. A number of incident scenarios were simulated, taking into account the prevailing meteorological conditions, and described in the report. 5.1 Notifiable Substances The General Machinery Regulation 8 and its Schedule A on notifiable substances requires any employer who has a substance equal to or exceeding the quantity as listed in the regulation to notify the divisional director. A site is classified as a Major Hazard Installation if it contains one or more notifiable substances or if the off-site risk is sufficiently high. The latter can only be determined from a quantitative risk assessment. No product stored on the Vopak site would be classified as notifiable.

5.2 Fires The proposed project of 6 x 20 000 m3 and 6 x 5 000 m3 tanks could contain either diesel or petrol. The risk assessment was based on the worst case scenario of petrol, having a higher flash point. Pool and flash fires from a loss of containment and ignition at the storage area were simulated. Large pool fires could damage surround tanks, but impacts to people would largely remain on site with impacts extending a short distance to the north and south of the site. However, the impacts would not extend beyond the Island View complex. Flash fires from a loss of containment of petrol within the bunded area would be expected to remain on site with the limit to the ½ LFL having the possibility to extend beyond the site boundary, but not the Island View complex.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xiii

No jet fires would be expected, as there are no pressurised flammable materials stored on site. 5.3 Explosions Vapour cloud explosions from spilt materials as well as tank explosions were simulated. Vapour cloud explosions could have offsite impacts. However, the 1% fatality for people in the open would remain within the Vopak boundary, with the exception to a short distance beyond the northern boundary. Tank explosions have potential to impact adjacent tanks, but would not have little impact beyond the site boundary. Impacts onto Neighbouring Properties, Residential Areas and MHIs Known MHIs, such as Nalco’s, and Transnet NMPP) could experience impacts, including potential fatalities and knock-on effects due to fire and explosion hazards. The risks to workers from such releases are considered tolerable.

5.4 Major Hazard Installation It should be noted that Section 2 of the MHI regulations applies only if the risk posed by the installation poses a risk to both workers and the public. The definition of a worker under the OHS Act No. 85 of 1993 is that a worker receives remuneration and works under supervision. As all personnel entering the Island View complex do so at the access point and have business within the secured complex, such personnel would be considered workers under that definition. The risk for the proposed project would have the 1x10˗6 fatalities per person per year isopleth extends a short distance beyond the Vopak site boundary, but not Island View complex. As the general public is located beyond the Island View complex boundary, the public would not be impacted by the proposed developments. While the proposed project alone, would not make the site a MHI, the classification would need to be evaluated from the full site risk assessment.


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xiv

6 RECOMMENDATIONS As a result of the risk assessment study conducted for the Growth 4 fuel Project at the Vopak facility in Island View some events were found to have risks beyond the site boundary. These risks could be mitigated to acceptable levels, as shown in the report. RISCOM did not find any fatal flaws that would prevent the project proceeding to the detailed engineering phase of the project. RISCOM would support the project with the following conditions: 1. Compliance with all statutory requirements, i.e. pressure vessel designs; 2. Compliance with applicable SANS codes, i.e. SANS 10087, SANS 10089,

SANS 10108, etc.; 3. Incorporation of applicable guidelines or equivalent international recognised codes of

good design and practice into the designs; 4. Completion of a recognised process hazard analysis (such as a HAZOP study,

FMEA, etc.) on the proposed facility prior to construction to ensure design and operational hazards have been identified and adequate mitigation put in place;

5. Full compliance with IEC 61508 and IEC 61511 (Safety Instrument Systems) standards or equivalent to ensure that adequate protective instrumentation is included in the design and would remain valid for the full life cycle of the tank farm:

6. Demonstration by Vopak or their contractor that the final designs would reduce the risks posed by the installation to internationally acceptable guidelines;

7. Signature of all engineering designs by a professional engineer registered in South Africa in accordance with the Professional Engineers Act, who takes responsibility for suitable designs;

8. Completion of an emergency preparedness and response document for on-site and off-site scenarios prior to initiating the MHI risk assessment (with input from local authorities);

9. Final acceptance of the facility risks with an MHI risk assessment that must be completed in accordance to the MHI regulations and that the risk assessment covers the entire facility:


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xv

Table of Contents 1 INTRODUCTION ........................................................................................................ 1-1

1.1 Legislation ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1.1 The Occupational Health and Safety Act No. 85 of 1993 and its Major

Hazard Installation Regulations .................................................................... 1-1 1.1.2 National Ports Act No. 12 of 2005 ................................................................ 1-3

1.2 Terms of Reference ............................................................................................. 1-3 1.3 Purpose and Main Activities ................................................................................ 1-3 1.4 Main Hazard Due to Substance and Process ...................................................... 1-4 1.5 Approach to the Study ......................................................................................... 1-4 1.6 Facility Inspection ................................................................................................ 1-4 1.7 Software .............................................................................................................. 1-4

2 ENVIRONMENT ......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 General Background ............................................................................................ 2-1 2.2 Meteorology......................................................................................................... 2-3

2.2.1 Surface Winds .............................................................................................. 2-3 2.2.2 Precipitation and Relative Humidity .............................................................. 2-5 2.2.3 Temperature ................................................................................................ 2-5 2.2.4 Atmospheric Stability .................................................................................... 2-6 2.2.5 Default Meteorological Value ........................................................................ 2-8

3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Site ...................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Process Description ............................................................................................. 3-2

3.2.1 Storage Tank Safety Features ...................................................................... 3-3 3.3 Growth 4 Project .................................................................................................. 3-4 3.4 Summary of Bulk Materials to be Stored on Site (Growth 4 Project) .................... 3-5

4 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION ........................................................................................ 4-1 4.1 Notifiable Substances .......................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Substance Hazards ............................................................................................. 4-2

4.2.1 Chemical Properties (See Appendix G) ........................................................ 4-2 4.2.2 Corrosive Liquids ......................................................................................... 4-3 4.2.3 Reactive Components .................................................................................. 4-3 4.2.4 Flammable and Combustible Components ................................................... 4-3 4.2.5 Toxic Components ....................................................................................... 4-4

4.3 Physical Properties .............................................................................................. 4-4 5 PHYSICAL AND CONSEQUENCE MODELLING ....................................................... 5-1

5.1 Multiple Consequence Scenarios ........................................................................ 5-2 5.1.1 Continuous Release of a Flammable Liquid ................................................. 5-2

5.2 Fires .................................................................................................................... 5-3 5.2.1 Thermal Radiation ........................................................................................ 5-3 5.2.2 Bund and Pool Fires ..................................................................................... 5-4 5.2.3 Flash Fires ................................................................................................. 5-13

5.3 Explosions ......................................................................................................... 5-14


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xvi

5.3.1 Vapour Cloud Explosions ........................................................................... 5-17 5.3.2 Fixed-Roof Tank Explosions....................................................................... 5-18 5.3.3 Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosions (BLEVEs) ............................. 5-18

5.4 Summary of Impacts .......................................................................................... 5-19 6 RISK ANALYSIS ......................................................................................................... 6-1

6.1 Background ......................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Predicted Risk ..................................................................................................... 6-2

6.2.1 Generic Equipment Failure Scenarios .......................................................... 6-3 6.3 Risk Calculations ................................................................................................. 6-6

6.3.1 Maximum Individual Risk Parameter ............................................................ 6-6 6.3.2 Acceptable Risks .......................................................................................... 6-6

6.4 Risk Scenarios .................................................................................................... 6-9 6.5 Risk Ranking ..................................................................................................... 6-10

7 CONCLUSIONS ......................................................................................................... 7-1 7.1 Notifiable Substances .......................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Fires .................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.3 Explosions ........................................................................................................... 7-2 7.4 Impacts onto Neighbouring Properties, Residential Areas and Major Hazard

Installations ......................................................................................................... 7-2 7.5 Major Hazard Installation ..................................................................................... 7-2

8 RECOMMENDATIONS ............................................................................................... 8-1 9 REFERENCES ........................................................................................................... 9-1 10 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS ....................................................................... 10-1 11 APPENDIX A: DEPARTMENT OF LABOUR CERTIFICATE .................................... 10-1 12 APPENDIX B: SANAS CERTIFICATES .................................................................... 10-1 13 APPENDIX C: ECSA REGISTRATION ..................................................................... 13-1 14 APPENDIX D: NOTIFICATION OF MAJOR HAZARD INSTALLATION .................... 14-2 15 APPENDIX E: REFERENCE DRAWINGS ................................................................ 15-1 16 APPENDIX F: INCIDENT SCENARIOS .................................................................... 16-1

16.1 Catastrophic Failure of Tanks ............................................................................ 16-1 16.1.1 Bund Fires .................................................................................................. 16-1 16.1.2 Flash Fires ................................................................................................. 16-2

16.2 Tank Overfill ...................................................................................................... 16-4 16.2.1 Bund Fires .................................................................................................. 16-4 16.2.2 Flash Fires ................................................................................................. 16-5 16.2.3 Vapour Cloud Explosions ........................................................................... 16-6

17 APPENDIX G: MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS ................................................ 17-1 17.1 Unleaded Petrol (ULP) ...................................................................................... 17-1 17.2 Diesel ................................................................................................................ 17-2


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xvii

List of Figures Figure 2-1: Location of the VopakVopak site at Island View, Durban ............................. 2-1 Figure 2-2: List of neighbouring facilities and their MHI classification ............................ 2-2 Figure 2-3: Wind rose generated from wind measurements at the old Durban

International Airport (2003˗2009) ................................................................. 2-4 Figure 2-4: Atmospheric stability as a function of wind direction .................................... 2-6 Figure 3-1: Layout of the Vopak facility .......................................................................... 3-1 Figure 3-2: Typical tank overfill configuration showing two independent level

transmitters and a level switch .................................................................... 3-2 Figure 3-3: Summary of the Terminal Efficiency Project changes at the Farewell-

King site ...................................................................................................... 3-4 Figure 5-1: Event tree for a continuous release of a flammable liquid ............................ 5-2 Figure 5-2: Thermal radiation from the major bund for different wind speeds ................ 5-5 Figure 5-3: Thermal radiation isopleths for major bund containing the 20 000 m3

storage tanks ............................................................................................... 5-6 Figure 5-4: Side view thermal radiation from a pool fire within the major bund .............. 5-7 Figure 5-5: 20 Kw/m2 thermal radiation isopleths from minor bund fires ........................ 5-7 Figure 5-6: Side view of the thermal radiation isopleths from a fire within a minor

bund ............................................................................................................ 5-8 Figure 5-7: Thermal radiation isopleths for major bund containing the 20 000 m3

storage tanks ............................................................................................... 5-9 Figure 5-8: Side view thermal radiation from a pool fire within the major bund ............ 5-10 Figure 5-9: 20 Kw/m2 thermal radiation isopleths from minor bund fires ...................... 5-10 Figure 5-10: Side view of the thermal radiation isopleths from a fire within a minor

bund .......................................................................................................... 5-11 Figure 5-11: Side view thermal radiation from a 20 000 m3 storage vessel tank top

fire ............................................................................................................. 5-12 Figure 5-12: Side view thermal radiation from a 5 000 m3 storage vessel tank top fire .. 5-12 Figure 5-13: The extent of flash fires to the LFL from a loss of containment of tanks

containing flammable materials in their bunds ........................................... 5-13 Figure 5-14: Blast overpressures of 0.1 bar for vapour cloud explosions resulting

from a loss of containment of the flammable storage tanks ....................... 5-17 Figure 5-15: The 1% fatality for fixed-roof tank explosions ............................................ 5-18 Figure 6-1: UK HSE decision-making framework ........................................................... 6-7 Figure 6-2: Combined risk isopleths for the Farewell-King site ...................................... 6-9 Figure 6-3: Risk ranking points .................................................................................... 6-10


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page xviii

List of Tables Table 2-1: Average monthly rainfall observed at the old Durban International

Airport ......................................................................................................... 2-5 Table 2-2: Classification scheme for atmospheric stability ............................................ 2-6 Table 2-3: Representative weather classes .................................................................. 2-7 Table 2-4: Allocation of observations into six weather classes ..................................... 2-7 Table 2-5: The default meteorological values used in the PHAST simulation, based

on local conditions ....................................................................................... 2-8 Table 3-1: Summary of hazardous components to be stored on the Farewell site ........ 3-5 Table 4-1: Flammable and combustible components to be stored on site .................... 4-3 Table 4-2: Representative components ........................................................................ 4-4 Table 5-1: Thermal radiation guidelines (BS 5980–1990) ............................................. 5-3 Table 5-2: Summary of consequences of blast overpressure (Clancey 1972) ............ 5-15 Table 5-3: Damage caused by overpressure effects of an explosion

(Stephens 1970) ........................................................................................ 5-16 Table 5-4: Summary of impacts .................................................................................. 5-19 Table 6-1: The influence of public perception of risk on the acceptance of that risk,

based on the POST report ........................................................................... 6-1 Table 6-2: Failure frequencies for atmospheric tanks ................................................... 6-3 Table 6-3: Failure frequencies for pressure vessels ..................................................... 6-3 Table 6-4: Human failure rates of specific types of tasks .............................................. 6-4 Table 6-5: The probability of direct ignition for stationary installations (RIVM 2009) ..... 6-5 Table 6-6: Classification of flammable substances ....................................................... 6-5 Table 6-7: Scenarios at the North point with highest contribution to the risk value...... 6-10 Table 6-8: Scenarios at the South point with highest contribution to the risk value ..... 6-11 Table 6-9: Scenarios at the East point with highest contribution to the risk value ....... 6-11 Table 6-10: Scenarios at the West point with highest contribution to the risk value ...... 6-11 Table 15-1: Reference drawings .................................................................................. 15-1


© RISCOM (PTY) LTD R/16/K&T-05 Rev 0 Page 1-1


ISLAND VIEW, DURBAN 1 INTRODUCTION Vopak Terminal Durban (Pty) Ltd (hereinafter referred to as Vopak) owns and operates three separate facilities in the vicinity of the Island View complex. This report focuses on the fire risk assessment for the Growth 4 Project at the Farewell-King site that has its physical address at 105 Taiwan Road in Island View. The intent of this risk assessment is to supply sufficient detail to complete a fire design suitable for the proposed fuel tanks, as part of the Growth 4 Project. The risk assessment was done in accordance to the Occupational Health and Safety Act (85 of 1993) and its Major Hazard Installation Regulation, but limited to the proposed installation of fuel tanks as outlined in the Growth 4 Project. The remainder of the site has been excluded from this study and thus this report may not be suitable for submission as a Major Hazardous Installation Risk Assessment. 1.1 Legislation 1.1.1 The Occupational Health and Safety Act No. 85 of 1993 and its Major Hazard

Installation Regulations Concern about the health and safety of the public has led to the regulation of the handling, storage and use of industrial chemicals. On the 16th of January 1998, the Major Hazard Installation regulations were promulgated under the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Act No. 85 of 1993; hereinafter referred to as the OHS Act), with a further amendment on the 30th of July 2001. The provisions of the regulations apply to installations which have on their premises a quantity of a substance and which can pose a significant risk (our emphasis) to the health and safety of employees and the public. It is important to note that the MHI regulations are applicable to the risks posed and not merely the consequences, as discussed in Appendix D. This implies that both the consequence and likelihood of an event need to be evaluated, with the classification of an installation being determined on the risk posed to the employees and the public. In accordance with legislation, the risk assessment must be done by an approved inspection authority (AIA), which is registered with the Department of Labour and accredited by the South African Accreditation Systems (SANAS). Copies of the relevant certificates are given in Appendix A and Appendix B. Furthermore, the SANS 10089-1 and the Engineering Profession Act, 46 of 2000 requires registration with the Engineering Council of South Africa. A copy of the author’s registration certificate is given in Appendix C



The regulations, summarised in Appendix D, essentially consists of six parts, namely: 1. Duties for notification of a Major Hazard Installation (existing or proposed), including:

a. Fixed; b. Temporary installations;

2. Minimum requirements for a quantitative risk assessment (QRA); 3. Requirements for an on-site emergency plan; 4. Reporting steps for risk and emergency occurrences; 5. General duties required of suppliers; 6. General duties required of local government.

This report contains information summaries with special focus on quantitative risk assessment and comment on on-site emergency plans. The requirements following an incident and the general duties required from the supplier and local government will merely be repeated from the regulations. The OHS Act shall not apply in respect of: “ a) A mine, a mining area or any works as defined in the Minerals Act, 1991 (Act

No. 50 of 1991), except in so far as that Act provides otherwise; b) Any load line ship (including a ship holding a load line exemption certificate),

fishing boat, sealing boat and whaling boat as defined in Section 2 (1) of the Merchant Shipping Act, 1951 (Act No. 57 of 1951), or any floating crane, whether or not such ship, boat or crane is in or out of the water within any harbour in the Republic or within the territorial waters thereof, (date of commencement of paragraph (b) to be proclaimed.), or in respect of any person present on or in any such mine, mining area, works, ship, boat or crane. ”

While the OHS Act has made provision for excluding the application of the act on shipping activities, Clause 78 (see below) of the Government Notice 255 Ports Rules (March 2009) requires compliance of the OHS Act and its regulations: “ 78. Occupational health and safety legislation All persons, including service providers, terminal operators, drivers of

transport vehicles, employers, lessees and visitors within port limits, must comply with the provisions of any legislation relating to occupational health and safety matters, including the Merchant Shipping Act No. 57 of 1951, the Occupational Health and Safety Act No. 85 of 1993 and its regulations, the Maritime Safety Regulations of 1994, the IMDG Code and the National Road Traffic Act No. 93 of 1996. ”



1.1.2 National Ports Act No. 12 of 2005 The National Ports Act gives instruction to operations within the Ports Authority jurisdiction and includes the development of the port, provision of services and the control of operations within the port. This project clearly falls under the National Ports Act as per the definition of the act: “ …‘port terminal’ means terminal infrastructure, cargo-handling equipment,

sheds and other land-based structures used for the loading, storage, transhipment and discharging of cargo or the embarkation and disembarkation of passengers… ”

The National Ports Act states that Transnet is responsible for the land development as well as the health and safety of people within the Port of Durban. See the subsection regarding the applicability of the OHS Act and its MHI regulations. 1.2 Terms of Reference The main aim of the investigation was to supply enough information for the development of a firefighting system to adequately deal with the risk posed from the proposed project. This risk assessment was conducted in accordance with the Major Hazard Installation regulations. The scope of the risk assessment for the new fuel tanks included: 1. The development of accidental spill and fire scenarios for the storage facility; 2. Using generic failure rate data (tanks, pumps, valves, flanges, pipework, gantry,

couplings, etc.), the determination of the probability of each accident scenario; 3. For each incident developed in Step 2, the determination of the consequences

(thermal radiation, domino effects, toxic-cloud formation, etc.); 4. The calculation of maximum individual risk (MIR), taking into account all accidents,

meteorological conditions and lethality; 5. The inclusion of an assessment of the adequacy of emergency-response

programmes, fire prevention and fire-fighting measures. The risk assessment is not an environmental risk assessment and may not comply with requirements outside of the OHS Act or its MHI regulations. The risk assessment excluded the existing tanks and bunds, gantries, pumps and hose exchanges, offices, laboratories and workshops 1.3 Purpose and Main Activities The Vopak site is used exclusively for the storage and distribution of a variety of commodity chemicals and fuels. Most of the chemicals and fuels are received and dispatched in bulk to or from ships, rail cars and road tankers. No chemical or fuel processing is conducted on site; however, facilities exist to decant bulk materials into drums according to market demands.



1.4 Main Hazard Due to Substance and Process The main hazards that would occur with a loss of containment of hazardous components at the Vopak site include:

Thermal radiation from fires; Overpressure from explosions.

1.5 Approach to the Study As mentioned in the previous subsection, the MHI regulations give instructions to the owner regarding the requirements of the risk assessment but stops short on giving the methodologies and criteria that must be used for such studies. As an AIA, RISCOM uses the methodologies and criteria described in the internationally recognised CPR 18E (1999) (Purple Book) and RIVM (2009). This is a requirement of accreditation and implies that similar results should be obtained by independent risk assessors compliant to the aforementioned documents. Furthermore, CPR 18E (1999) (Purple Book) and RIVM (2009) are legal requirements for conducting quantitative risk assessments (QRAs) in the Netherlands and form the basis of the commercially available software. The evaluation and acceptability of the risks is extended to the Health and Safety Executive (HSE) of the (UK) ALARP criteria, which explains clearly and covers land use based on the determined risks in the Section 6. 1.6 Facility Inspection The Vopak site in 105 Taiwan Road in Island View. was inspected on the 5th of September 2014, with the objective of verifying that information supplied to RISCOM reflected the built information and also to examine certain aspects of the operation to ensure a representative risk assessment of the facility. The inspector representing RISCOM during the site visit was Mr M P Oberholzer. The representative of the client during the site visit was Ms Carla Manion. 1.7 Software The physical consequences were calculated with DNV’s PHAST v. 6.7/7.11 while the risk isopleths were generated using TNO’s RISKCURVES v. 9.0.26. All calculations were performed by Mr M P Oberholzer.



2 ENVIRONMENT 2.1 General Background The Vopak site is located at 105 Taiwan Road in Island View., as shown in Figure 2-1, and occupies Lot 112, Lot 113 and Lot 114B of Fynnland, Island View. The site is located less than 5 m above mean sea level within Island View as part of the Durban harbour on the east coast of South Africa. Island View forms part of the greater South Durban Industrial Basin, which runs parallel to the relatively warm Indian Ocean. A bluff of approximately 80–100 m in height separates the South Durban Industrial Basin from the coastline. The land-sea interface and the peculiar topographical features have an influence on air dispersion in the region. Land use in the surrounding area of the Vopak terminal is a mixture of residential and industrial. Heavy industry dominates the immediate vicinity, including tank terminals, blending plants and shipping terminals, some of which belong to companies such as Sasol, Transnet, Engen and Island View Storage (IVS). The central business district of Durban is situated to the north of site across the Durban harbour. The closest residential areas are Fynnland, the Bluff, Ocean View and Grosvenor located to the south and Clairwood to the southwest. The Fynnland residential area is located less than 1.0 km from site.

Figure 2-1: Location of the VopakVopak site at Island View, Durban



Information of companies neighbouring Vopak and their classification as MHIs can be seen in Figure 2-2. The following neighbouring facilities have made themselves known to Vopak as MHIs: Nalco’s, IVS and Transnet NMPP.

No. Company Name MHI 1 Sasol Nalco’s Yes 2 Island View Storage (IVS) Yes 3 Transnet New Multi-Product Pipeline (NMPP) Yes 4 Transnet New Multi-Product Pipeline (NMPP) Yes 5 H&R Wax No 6 Engen Unknown

Figure 2-2: List of neighbouring facilities and their MHI classification



2.2 Meteorology Meteorological mechanisms govern the dispersion, transformation and eventual removal of hazardous vapours from the atmosphere. The extent to which hazardous vapours will accumulate or disperse in the atmosphere is dependent on the degree of thermal and mechanical turbulence within the earth's boundary layer. Dispersion comprises of vertical and horizontal components of motion. The stability of the atmosphere and the depth of the surface, i.e. the mixing layer, define the vertical component. The horizontal dispersion of hazardous vapours in the boundary layer is primarily a function of wind field. Wind speed determines both the distance of downwind transport and the rate of dilution as a result of plume stretching. Similarly, the generation of mechanical turbulence is a function of the wind speed in combination with surface roughness. Wind direction and variability in wind direction both determine the general path hazardous vapours will follow and the extent of crosswind spreading. Concentration levels of hazardous vapours therefore fluctuate in response to changes in atmospheric stability, to concurrent variations in the mixing depth and to shifts in the wind field. Meteorological data was analysed to characterise the atmospheric dispersion potential for Durban. Meteorological parameters that were taken into account included wind speed and direction from the old Durban International Airport from the 1st of January 2003 to the 21st of December 2008, was supplied by the South African Weather Service. 2.2.1 Surface Winds The predominant winds blow from the north-northeast and the south-southwest in about equal proportions (approximately 30% for each sector), with calm periods occurring about 18% of the year. Gales are infrequent. An annual average wind rose for the old Durban International Airport for the years 2003 to 2009 is shown in Figure 2-3. The north-northeasterly wind represents the influence of both the sea breeze and the gradient wind component. During summer months, such winds are frequently associated with the occurrence of berg winds and heat waves. The south-southwesterly winds tend to occur to the rear of frontal depressions and usually extent to 900 metres above the surface, depending on the depth of the depression. South-southwesterlies are thus associated with the onset of colder, cloudier weather. Southeasterly winds rarely occur at Durban, and when they do it is generally associated with an advancing coastal low (Schulze 1980).



Figure 2-3: Wind rose generated from wind measurements at the old Durban International Airport (2003˗2009)



Although wind shifts between the north-northeasterly and south-southwesterly sector characterise all months of the year, the frequency with which such wind fields occur varies seasonally as a function of the synoptic climatology of the region. During winter, the percentage of south-southwesterly winds increase due to the northward shift of the high-pressure belt and the increasing influence of westerly wave disturbances over the region. North-northeasterlies increase in frequency during summer months, indicating that the easterlies and anticyclonic activity have resumed their influence on the region. Diurnal variations are due to the influence of land-sea breeze circulations on the airflow of the region. Land-sea breeze circulation arises due to the differential heating and cooling of land and water surfaces. During the day, the land is heated more rapidly than the sea surface. A horizontal pressure gradient develops with surface convergence and ascent over the land and descent and surface divergence over the sea. Sea breezes therefore characterise the daytime surface circulation, resulting in the prevalence of easterly winds at the site, with return currents dominating the upper airflow. By night time, the land cools more quickly than the sea surface resulting in a reversal of the daytime sea breeze and upper air return currents and the onset of land breezes at the surface. 2.2.2 Precipitation and Relative Humidity The east coast is one of the wettest regions in South Africa. The average annual rainfall varies from about 760 mm in the northern interior to 1250 mm on parts of the coast. Rain falls mainly in summer from October to March, with the peak being between February and March. Rain days per year average from about 120 to 140 (128.8 mean), which ranges from 15 days per month during the peak rainy season to about 3 or 4 per month during the winter. Average monthly rainfall and number of rain days for the old Durban International Airport is given in Table 2-1. The mean annual average rainfall is 1018 mm, with summer rainfall constituting between 70% and 80% of the average annual. Table 2-1: Average monthly rainfall observed at the old Durban International

Airport Rainfall (mm) Jan Feb Mar Apr May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec

Average Monthly Rainfall 135 114 124 87 64 26 44 58 65 65 104 108

Average No. of Days (> 0.1 mm) 15 12 12 9.4 6.7 4.5 4.9 6.6 10 14 16 15

Relative humidity at the site varies diurnally, with a mean annual relative humidity at the site of 77%, 65% and 83% for 08h00, 14h00 and 20h00, respectively, according to the Weather Bureau (1986). Ranges for such times are 74-79%, 54-71% and 81-84%, respectively. 2.2.3 Temperature Due to cloudy weather during summer months, the east coast experiences a sunshine duration of about 45% of the possible, and insolation durations of 70% occur during winter months. Average annual cloud cover is 50%, 47.5% and 61.25% for 08h00, 14h00 and 20h00, respectively. The annual maximum temperature is 25.2°C and the minimum 16.2°C. Average daily maximum temperatures range from 28°C in February to 22.7°C in July. Extreme temperatures frequently occur due to berg wind conditions.



2.2.4 Atmospheric Stability Atmospheric stability is frequently categorised into one of six stability classes. These are briefly described in Table 2-2. The atmospheric stability, in combination with the wind speed, is important in determining the extent of a particular hazardous vapour from a release. A very stable atmospheric condition, typically at night, would have low wind speeds and produce the greatest endpoint for a dense gas. Conversely, a buoyant gas would have the greatest endpoint distance due to high wind speeds. Table 2-2: Classification scheme for atmospheric stability

Stability Class

Stability Classification Description

A Very unstable Calm wind, clear skies, hot daytime conditions B Moderately unstable Clear skies and daytime conditions

C Unstable Moderate wind, slightly overcast daytime conditions

D Neutral Strong winds or cloudy days and nights

E Stable Moderate wind, slightly overcast night-time conditions

F Very stable Low winds, clear skies, cold night-time conditions Figure 2-4 depicts the atmospheric stability distribution for each wind direction, as calculated from the hourly weather measurements supplied by the South African Weather Service over the period from January 2003 to December 2008.

Figure 2-4: Atmospheric stability as a function of wind direction



This risk assessment’s calculations are based on six representative weather classes covering the stability conditions of stable, neutral and unstable as well as low and high wind speeds. In terms of Pasquill classes, the representative conditions are given in Table 2-3. Table 2-3: Representative weather classes

Stability Class Wind (m/s) B 3 D 1.5 D 5 D 9 E 5 F 1.5

As wind velocities are vector quantities (i.e. have speed and direction) and blow preferentially in certain directions, it is mathematically incorrect to give an average wind speed over the 360°C of wind direction and will result in incorrect risk calculations. It also would not be correct to base the risk calculations on one wind category, e.g. 1.5/F. In order to obtain representative risk calculations, hourly weather data for wind speed and direction was analysed over a five-year period and categorised into the six wind classes for day and night time conditions and 16 wind directions. The risk was then determined using the contributions of each wind class in various wind directions. The allocation of observations into the six weather classes is summarised in Table 2-4. Table 2-4: Allocation of observations into six weather classes

Wind Speed A B B/C C C/D D E F < 2.5 m/s

B 3 m/s D 1.5 m/s F 1.5 m/s

2.5 - 6 m/s D 5 m/s E 5 m/s

> 6 m/s D 9 m/s



2.2.5 Default Meteorological Value The default meteorological values used in the simulations, based on local conditions, are given below in Table 2-5. Table 2-5: The default meteorological values used in the PHAST simulation,

based on local conditions Parameter Default Value Daytime Default Value Night-time

Ambient temperature (°C) 25.2 16.2 Substrate/bund temperature (°C) 20.7 20.7

Water temperature (°C) 20.7 20.7 Air pressure (bar) 1.013 1.013

Humidity (%) 65 83 Fraction of a 24-hour period 0.5 0.5

Mixing height 1 1

1 The default values for the mixing height, which are included in the model, are 1500 m for weather

category B3, 300 m for weather category D1.5, 500 m for weather category D5 and D9, 230 m for weather category E5 and 50 m for weather category F1.5.



3 PROCESS DESCRIPTION 3.1 Site The Vopak site occupies Lot 112, Lot 113 and Lot 114B of Fynnland in Island View. As illustrated in Figure 3-1, the site is bounded by Abadan Road to the north, Taiwan Road to the east, and Trinidad Road to South. Lot 113 is shared between Farewell and H&R Waxes (located south of the site). Lot 114A, located to the west of the site, is occupied by IVS.

No. Description No. Description 1 Offices 2 Road gantries 3 Road gantry (acrylonitrile; ACN) 4 Rail gantries 5 H&R Wax 6 Main gate 7 Diesel or unleaded petrol tanks

Figure 3-1: Layout of the Vopak facility The main entrance to the site is on Taiwan Road. It is through this entrance that most of the road tankers pass to either load or dispatch chemicals. The rail traffic enters from the northern part of the site to the rail loading gantries. The offices and control room are located on the north eastern corner along Abadan Road. The remainder of site south of the offices and road and rail gantries is occupied by about 90 bulk storage tanks ranging in size from 50 m3 to 5206 m3. These tanks are located into various bunds in a grid formation separated by roads.



3.2 Process Description The terminal is designed to receive, store and dispatch a variety of commodity bulk liquid chemicals. Receipts and dispatches are very flexible in type i.e. material can be delivered to site by ship, rail or road and pumped to the desired tanks. Likewise, the products stored in the tanks can either be decanted into 200 litre drums or dispatched in bulk via ships, rail or road. All the atmospheric tanks located on site are vertical, fixed-roof atmospheric tanks designed to API 650 or API 620. The tanks are protected with either free venting or pressure or vacuum vents, depending on the tank design. Some tanks have the facility to insert a nitrogen blanket over flammable materials to reduce the risk of combustion. Certain tanks are vented to the atmosphere via scrubbers to reduce offensive odours and exposure to potentially toxic fumes. All other tanks would have two independent level transmitters with alarms that indicate high level as well as an independent level switch that would close the incoming valve, as shown in Figure 3-2.

Figure 3-2: Typical tank overfill configuration showing two independent level

transmitters and a level switch



The connecting of the various tanks and pumps are achieved by hose exchanges where non-permanent pipe spools or hoses are manually connected in order to line up the tanks prior to pumping. These hose exchange areas are located in bunded areas to catch any spillage. The rail and road loading are performed at dedicated unloading or loading gantries. Some unloading or loading gantries are equipped with vapour return lines (mostly where toxic components are loaded). The loading of the rail and road cars is controlled manually, while the loading of acrylonitrile (ACN) is done via a dedicated batching system that would close the supply vales when a high level is detected in the rail tankers. Gas detection and emergency stops are also present at the gantry that will shut down the supply pumps under emergency conditions. Bulk chemicals can be decanted into drums at the drum loading facilities as needed. Thereafter, the drums are temporarily stored in a drum area (with containment) and then are dispatched as soon as possible. 3.2.1 Storage Tank Safety Features Procedures and checklists are in place and are used in the day-to-day safe operation of the facility. 3.2.1.1 Engineering Controls The engineering design features present that reduce risks are as follows:

All tanks are earthed; Most tanks containing materials of a low flashpoint, other than acrylates, have

nitrogen blanketing to reduce the risks of ignition: Some tank vents are connected to permanent scrubbers to limit offensive odours and

toxic fumes venting into the atmosphere; Some tanks return vapours to the offloading ship, road and rail cars; The entire Farewell-King site (excluding offices) has an electrical area classification of

Zone 1; Tanks have overfilling protection.

3.2.1.2 Protective Systems The protective features of the storage facility include:

All tanks are bunded: o All spills would be contained within the bunded area;

Each tank has fixed water spray rings that spray cooling water onto the tank shell in the event of a fire;

Each bund has a fixed foam system; Some of the newer tanks are equipped with foam injection devices to douse fires in

individual tanks; Acrylonitrile road tanker filling points are protected with a spray tunnel; The pump bays are protected by water sprays.



3.3 Growth 4 Project The changes to the site according to the Growth 4 Project and taken account of in this risk assessment include:

Tanks: o The Farewell bunds 1A, 1B, 1C, 2A, 2B and 2C are to be demolished and

replaced with 6 x 20 000 m3 and 6 x 5 000 m3 storage tanks containing either petrol of diesel (see Figure 3-3);

o Nine existing tanks at Farewell site would be demolished and replaced with Road-loading facilities:

o No changes; Rail-loading facilities:

o No changes.

Figure 3-3: Summary of the Terminal Efficiency Project changes at the Farewell-

King site The proposed tanks would be atmospheric, vertical tanks internal floating roofs and would be able to store either diesel or petrol. All tanks will be 32.4 m in height with tank diameter of 28 and 14 m for the 20 000m3 and 5 000 m3 tanks respectively. Overfill protection of the tanks would be consistent with the other tanks on site (see Figure 3-2). The 20 000 m3 tanks would have a single secondary containment for all six tanks of a bunded area of 7560 m2. The bund will have internal walls between the tanks to catch minor spills. The minor bund of each tank will be approximately 1260 m2. The outer wall would have to be approximately 3 m in height to retain 110% of the largest tank.



The 5 000 m3 will be similar to the 20 000 m3 tanks, having a single containment for all six tanks with a bunded area of 1985 m2. The bund will have internal walls between the tanks to catch minor spills The minor bund of each tank will be approximately 330 m2. The outer wall would have to be approximately 3 m height to retain 110% of the largest tank.

3.4 Summary of Bulk Materials to be Stored on Site (Growth 4 Project) A summary of bulk materials forming part of the proposed project are given in Table 3-1 . Table 3-1: Summary of hazardous components to be stored on the Farewell site

Tank No. Product Tank Type

Tank Height

(m)

Tank Diameter

(m)

Tank Volume

(m3) T075 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000

T076 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T077 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T078 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T079 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T080 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 28 20 000 T081 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T082 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T083 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T084 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T085 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000 T086 ULP/Diesel Vertical, atmospheric 32.4 14 5 000



4 HAZARD IDENTIFICATION The first step in any risk assessment is to identify all hazards. The merit of including a hazard for further investigation is then determined by how significant it is, normally by using a cut-off or threshold value. Once a hazard has been identified, it is necessary to assess it in terms of the risk it presents to the employees and the neighbouring community. In principle, both probability and consequence should be considered but there are occasions where, if either the probability or the consequence can be shown to be sufficiently low or sufficiently high, decisions can be made based on just one factor. During the hazard identification component of the report, the following considerations are taken into account:

Chemical identities; Location of on-site installations that use, produce, process, transport or store

hazardous components; Type and design of containers, vessels or pipelines; Quantity of material that could be involved in an airborne release; Nature of the hazard most likely to accompany hazardous materials spills or releases,

e.g. airborne toxic vapours or mists, fires or explosions, large quantities to be stored and certain handling conditions of processed components.

The evaluation methodology assumes that the facility will perform as designed in the absence of unintended events such as component and material failures of equipment, human errors, external events and process unknowns. 4.1 Notifiable Substances The General Machinery Regulation 8 and its Schedule A on notifiable substances requires any employer who has a substance equal to or exceeding the quantity as listed in the regulation to notify the divisional director. A site is classified as a Major Hazard Installation if it contains one or more notifiable substances or if the off-site risk is sufficiently high. The latter can only be determined from a quantitative risk assessment. No product stored on the Vopak site would be classified as notifiable.



4.2 Substance Hazards All components on site were assessed for potential hazards according to the criteria discussed in this section. 4.2.1 Chemical Properties (See Appendix G) A short description of extremely hazardous components relevant to this report is given in the following subsections. 4.2.1.1 Petrol (Gasoline) Petrol is a hydrocarbon mixture with variable composition with a boiling point range of between 20°C and 215°C. It is a pale yellow liquid with strong petroleum odour. Due to the flash point at minus 40°C, this material is considered highly flammable and will readily ignite under suitable conditions. The vapours are heavier than air and may travel some distance to an ignition source. Petrol may contain up to 5% volume of benzene, a known animal carcinogen. It may also contain ethers and alcohols, as oxygenates, to a maximum concentration of 2%. It may also contain small quantities of multifunctional additives to enhance performance. It is stable under normal conditions. It will react with strong oxidising agents and nitrate compounds, which may cause fires and explosions. Although it is of a low to moderate oral toxicity to adults, ingestion of small quantities may prove dangerous or fatal to small children. Contact with vapours may result in slight irritation to nose, eyes and skin. Vapours may cause headache, dizziness, loss of consciousness or suffocation; lung irritation with coughing, gagging, dyspnoea, substernal distress and rapidly developing pulmonary oedema. If swallowed, it may cause nausea or vomiting, swelling of the abdomen, headache, CNS depression, coma and death. The long-term effects of exposure have not been determined. However, it may affect lungs and may cause the skin to dry out and become cracked. Petrol floats on water and can result in environmental hazards with large spills into waterways. It is harmful to aquatic life in high concentrations. 4.2.1.2 Diesel Diesel is a hydrocarbon mixture with variable composition and a boiling-point range between 252°C and 371°C. It is a pale yellow liquid with a petroleum odour. Due to a flashpoint between 38°C and 65°C, it is not considered highly flammable, but it will readily ignite under suitable conditions. It is stable under normal conditions. It will react with strong oxidising agents and nitrate compounds. This reaction may cause fires and explosions. Diesel is not considered a toxic material. Contact with vapours may result in slight irritation to nose, eyes and skin. Vapours may cause headache, dizziness, loss of consciousness or



suffocation as well as lung irritation with coughing, gagging, dyspnoea, substernal distress and rapidly developing pulmonary oedema. If swallowed, it may cause nausea or vomiting, swelling of the abdomen, headache, CNS depression, coma and death. The long-term effects of exposure have not been determined. However, this may affect the lungs and may cause the skin to dry out and become cracked. Diesel floats on water and can result in environmental hazards with large spills into waterways. It is harmful to aquatic life in high concentrations

4.2.2 Corrosive Liquids Corrosive liquids considered under this subsection are those components that have a low or high pH and that may cause burns if they come into contact with people or may attack and cause failure of equipment. Substances would be considered corrosive are acrylonitrile and propionic acid. These materials are however located in bunded areas and would not reach the site boundary. 4.2.3 Reactive Components Reactive components are components that when mixed or exposed to one another react in a way that may cause a fire, explosion or release a toxic component. All components to be stored on, produced at or delivered to site are considered thermally stable in atmospheric conditions. The reaction with air is covered under the subsection dealing with ignition probabilities. 4.2.4 Flammable and Combustible Components Flammable and combustible components are those that can ignite and give a number of possible hazardous effects, depending on the nature of the component and conditions. These effects may include pool fires, jet fires and flash fires as well as explosions and fireballs. The flammable and combustible components to be stored on site are listed in Table 4-1. These components have been analysed for fire and explosion risks. Table 4-1: Flammable and combustible components to be stored on site

Component Flashpoint (°C)

Boiling Point (°C)

LFL (vol. %)

UFL (vol. %)

ULP -40 87 1.4 7.6 Diesel > 55 290 0.6 7.5



4.2.5 Toxic Components Toxic materials of interest to this study are those that could give dispersing vapour clouds upon release into the atmosphere. These could subsequently cause harm through inhalation or absorption through the skin. Typically, the hazard posed by toxic material will depend on both concentration of the material in the air and the exposure duration. Diesel and petrol are not considered toxic products. 4.3 Physical Properties The physical properties used in the simulations were based on the DIPPR1 data base. Components were modelled as pure components as shown in Table 4-2. Table 4-2: Representative components

Component Modelled as ULP n-Heptane

Diesel n-Dodecane

1 Design Institute for Physical PRoperties



5 PHYSICAL AND CONSEQUENCE MODELLING In order to establish the impacts following an accident, it is necessary first to estimate: the physical process of the spill (i.e. rate and size); the spreading of the spill; the evaporation from the spill; the subsequent atmospheric dispersion of the airborne cloud; and, in the case of ignition, the burning rate and resulting thermal radiation from a fire and the overpressures from an explosion. The second step is then to estimate the consequences of a release on humans, fauna, flora and structures. This merely illustrates the significance and the extent of the impact in the event of a release. The consequences would be due to toxic and asphyxiant vapours, thermal radiation or explosion overpressures. The consequences may be described in various formats. The simplest methodology follows a comparison of predicted concentrations (or thermal radiation or overpressures) to short-term guideline values. In a different, but more realistic fashion, the consequences may be determined by using a dose-response analysis. Dose-response analysis aims to relate the intensity of the phenomenon that constitutes the hazard to the degree of injury or damage that it can cause. Probit analysis is possibly the method mostly used to estimate probability of death, hospitalisation or structural damage. The probit is a lognormal distribution and represents a measure of the percentage of the vulnerable resource that sustains injury or damage. The probability of injury or death (i.e. risk level) is in turn estimated from this probit (risk characterisation). The consequence modelling gives an indication of the extent of the impact for selected events and is used primarily for emergency planning. A consequence that would not cause irreversible injuries would be considered insignificant, and no further analysis would be required. The effects from major incidents are summarised in the following subsections.



5.1 Multiple Consequence Scenarios A particular scenario may produce more than one major consequence. In such cases, the consequences are evaluated separately and assigned failure frequencies in the risk analysis. Some of these phenomena are described in the subsections that follow. 5.1.1 Continuous Release of a Flammable Liquid A continuous loss of containment of flammable liquids could result in the consequences given in the event tree of Figure 5-1. The probabilities of the events occurring are dependent on a number of factors and are determined accordingly. All the scenarios shown in the figure are determined separately and reported in the relevant subsections of the report.

Figure 5-1: Event tree for a continuous release of a flammable liquid



5.2 Fires Combustible materials within their flammable limits may ignite and burn if exposed to an ignition source of sufficient energy. On process plants this normally occurs as a result of a leakage or spillage. Depending on the physical properties of the material and the operating parameters, the combustion of material may take on a number of forms, i.e. pool fires, jet fires and flash fires. 5.2.1 Thermal Radiation The effect of thermal radiation is very dependent on the type of fire and duration exposed to the thermal radiation. Certain codes, such as API 520 and API 2000, suggest the maximum heat absorbed by vessels for adequate relief designs to prevent the vessel from failure due to overpressure. Other codes, such as API 510 and BS 5980, give guidelines for the maximum thermal-radiation intensity that act as a guide to equipment layout, as given in Table 5-1. The effect of thermal radiation on human health has been widely studied, relating injuries to the time and intensity of the radiation exposure. Table 5-1: Thermal radiation guidelines (BS 5980–1990)

Thermal Radiation Intensity (kW/m2)

Limit

1.5 Will cause no discomfort for long exposure

2.1 Sufficient to cause pain if unable to reach cover within 40 seconds

4.5 Sufficient to cause pain if unable to reach cover within 20 seconds

12.5 Minimum energy required for piloted ignition of wood and melting of plastic tubing

25 Minimum energy required to ignite wood at indefinitely long exposures

37.5 Sufficient to cause serious damage to process equipment For pool fires, jet fires and flash fires CPR 18E suggests the following thermal radiation levels be reported:

4 kW/m2, the level that glass can withstand, preventing the fire entering a building, and that should be used for emergency planning;

10 kW/m2, the level that represents the 1% fatality for 20 seconds of unprotected exposure and at which plastic and wood may start to burn, transferring the fire to other areas;

35 kW/m2, the level at which spontaneous ignition of hair and clothing occurs, with an assumed 100% fatality, and at which initial damage to steel may occur.



5.2.2 Bund and Pool Fires Pool fires, either tank or bund fires, consist of large volumes of liquid flammable material at atmospheric pressure burning in an open space. The flammable material will be consumed at the burning rate, depending on factors including the prevailing winds. During combustion heat will be released in the form of thermal radiation. Temperatures close to the flame centre will be high but will reduce rapidly to tolerable temperatures over a relatively short distance. Any building or persons close to the fire or within the intolerable zone will experience burn damage with the severity depending on the distance from the fire and the time exposed to the heat of the fire. In the event of a pool fire, the flames will tilt according to the wind speed and direction. The flame length and tilt angle affect the distance of thermal radiation generated. Pool fires are modelled as cylinder that tilts depending on the wind speed. Generally, the higher the wind speed, the greater the angle or the tilt. The view factor, calculated to an individual at 1 m above the ground is dependent to the shape of the flame impacting on the individual. Clearly the view factor is dependent on the flame height which is related to the pool area. Typically, the flame height increases with the increase in the pool area. The combustion rate of the pool fire is dependent on the characteristics of the flammable material and the surface area of the pool. The energy released is then calculated as thermal radiation flux having units kW/m2, at the surface of the flame. The soot formed at the surface of the flame decreases the thermal radiation onto objects. The amount of soot is dependent on the characteristics of the flammable material and the size of the flammable pool. Unburnt carbon is depicted as a soot and is a result if insufficient oxygen reaching the pool. The pool fire model converts the pool into a circle with the same area. Thus for long rectangle shape, the thermal radiations are not truly representative of the pool shape.



5.2.2.1 Bund Fires

20 000 m3 Storage Tanks The 20000 m3 storage tank have a major bund that would contain the full contents from a loss of containment of a single tank, as well as six minor bunds that could contain minor spillages from the individual tanks A loss of containment of flammable materials into the major bund, followed by an ignition, could result in a pool fire contained within the bunded area. The thermal radiation isopleths form the major bund fire is shown in Figure 5-2. The maximum radiation of 20 kW/m2 is due to the soot formed at the flame surface. High thermal radiations can be found within the flame area. The thermal radiation drops rapidly from the flame surface. With the largest radiation distances occurring during a strong wind speed conditions.

Figure 5-2: Thermal radiation from the major bund for different wind speeds



The thermal radiation isopleths for the major bund is shown in Figure 5-3. The thin lines indicate a strong northerly wind while the thicker lines represent the thermal radiation from all directions. The 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation isopleths for a pool fire represent the endpoint for emergency planning. At this value people in the open can still escape the effects of the fire. The 10 kW/m2 thermal radiation isopleths, representing a 1% fatality and is lower limit to damage to plastics and instrumentation. The 20 kW/m2 thermal radiation represents the flame shape. The thermal radiation within the flame could result in 100 % fatalities with damage to steel objects over a period of time

0.00 0.06 0.12

km

LEGEND THERMAL RADIATION (kW/m2) 4 10 20 (flame surface)

Figure 5-3: Thermal radiation isopleths for major bund containing the 20 000 m3

storage tanks



The side elevation of the thermal radiation isopleths is shown in Figure 5-4. The centre of the bund is set at 0 m on the X axis. The pool fire has an elevation of 3 m and thus the thermal radiation drops to ground level downwind of the bund wall.

Figure 5-4: Side view thermal radiation from a pool fire within the major bund A large pool fire in the minor bunds could produce thermal radiations isopleths of 20 kW/m2, representing the flame shape, shown in Figure 5-5. It should be noted that the reference height is 1 m above ground and that the isopleths shown are from all wind directions

0.00 0.04 0.08

km Figure 5-5: 20 Kw/m2 thermal radiation isopleths from minor bund fires



The side view of the thermal radiations of a fire within a minor bund is shown in Figure 5-6. As the adjacent tank is approximately 23.5 m from the pool fire centre, the flame formed could impact adjacent tanks with potential steel damage.

Figure 5-6: Side view of the thermal radiation isopleths from a fire within a minor

bund



5 000 m3 Storage Tanks The 5 000 m3 storage tank have a major bund that would contain the full contents from a loss of containment of a single tank, as well as six minor bunds that could contain minor spillages from the individual tanks The thermal radiation isopleths for the major bund is shown in Figure 5-7. The thin lines indicate a strong northerly wind while the thicker lines represent the thermal radiation from all directions. The radiation isopleths are not truly represented, as the software creates a circular pool from the area given. The 4 kW/m2 thermal radiation isopleths for a pool fire represent the endpoint for emergency planning. At this value people in the open can still escape the effects of the fire. The 10 kW/m2 thermal radiation isopleths, representing a 1% fatality and lower limit to damage to plastics and instrumentation. The 20 kW/m2 thermal radiation represents the flame shape. The thermal radiation within the flame could result in 100 % fatalities with damage to steel objects over a period of time.

0.00 0.06 0.12

km

LEGEND THERMAL RADIATION (kW/m2) 4 10 20 (flame surface)

Figure 5-7: Thermal radiation isopleths for major bund containing the 20 000 m3

storage tanks



The side elevation of the thermal radiation of the thermal isopleths is shown in Figure 5-8. The centre of the bund is set at 0 m on the X axis. The pool fire has an elevation of 3 m and thus the thermal radiation drops to ground level downwind of the bund wall.

Figure 5-8: Side view thermal radiation from a pool fire within the major bund A large pool fire in the minor bunds could produce thermal radiations isopleths of 20 kW/m2, representing the flame shape, shown in Figure 5-9.

0.00 0.06 0.12

km

Figure 5-9: 20 Kw/m2 thermal radiation isopleths from minor bund fires



The side view of the thermal radiations of a fire within a minor bund is shown in Figure 5-10 with the bund center indicated as 0 m on the X axis. As the adjacent tank is approximately 11.7 m from the pool fire centre, the flame formed could impact adjacent tanks with potential steel damage.

Figure 5-10: Side view of the thermal radiation isopleths from a fire within a minor

bund



5.2.2.2 Tank-Top Fires A tank-top fire occurs within the tank, and thus the pool fire is limited to the area of the tank. A tank-top fire could escalate to a bund fire should the tank fail, releasing flammable or combustible material into the bund. The tank top fires from the 20 000 m3 and 5 000 m3 storage vessels are shown in Figure 5-11 and Figure 5-12 respectively under high wind speed conditions. It is unlikely that tank top fires would result in knock-on effects or pose life threatening conditions for people on the ground.

Figure 5-11: Side view thermal radiation from a 20 000 m3 storage vessel tank top

fire

Figure 5-12: Side view thermal radiation from a 5 000 m3 storage vessel tank top

fire



5.2.3 Flash Fires A loss of containment of flammable materials would mix with air and form a flammable mixture. The cloud of flammable material would be defined by the lower flammable limit (LFL) and the upper flammable limit (UFL). The extent of the flammable cloud would depend on the quantity of released material, physical properties of the released gas, wind speed and weather stability. An ignition within a flammable cloud can result in an explosion if the front is propagated by pressure. If the front is propagated by heat, then the fire moves across the flammable cloud at the flame velocity and is called a flash fire. Flash fires are characterised by low overpressure, with injuries caused by thermal radiation. The effects of overpressure due to an exploding cloud are covered in the subsection dealing with vapour cloud explosions (VCEs). A flash fire would extend to the lower flammable limit; however, due to the formation of pockets, it could extend beyond this limit to the point defined as the ½ LFL. It is assumed that people within the flash fire would experience lethal injuries while people outside of the flash fire would remain unharmed. The ½ LFL is used for emergency planning to evacuate people to a safe distance in the event of a release. 5.2.3.1 Bunds A loss of containment of tanks containing flammable materials within the bunded area could form flammable clouds. The extent of these flammable clouds to the LFL and ½ LFL is shown in Figure 5-13. The largest flash fire occurs with the loss of ULP at the Farewell site and extends beyond the site boundaries but would not extend beyond the Island View complex

0.00 0.08 0.16

km

LEGEND SCENARIO ½ LFL 20 000 m3 tanks- Major bund LFL 20 000 m3 tanks - Major bund ½ LFL 5 000 m3 tanks- Major bund LFL 5 000 m3 tanks - Major bund

Figure 5-13: The extent of flash fires to the LFL from a loss of containment of tanks containing flammable materials in their bunds



5.3 Explosions The concentration of a flammable component would decrease from the point of release to below the lower explosive limits (LEL), at which concentration the component can no longer ignite. The sudden detonation of an explosive mass would cause overpressures that could result in injury or damage to property. Such an explosion may give rise to any of the following effects:

Blast damage; Thermal damage; Missile damage; Ground tremors; Crater formation; Personal injury.

Obviously, the nature of these effects depends on the pressure waves and the proximity to the actual explosion. Of concern in this investigation are the ‘far distance effects’, such as limited structural damage and the breakage of windows, rather than crater formations. Table 5-2 and Table 5-3 give a more detailed summary of the damage produced by an explosion due to various overpressures. CPR 18E (Purple Book; 1999) suggests the following overpressures be determined:

0.03 bar overpressure, corresponding to the critical overpressure causing windows to break;

0.1 bar overpressure, corresponding to 10% of the houses being severely damaged and a probability of death indoors equal to 0.025:

o No lethal effects are expected below 0.1 bar overpressure on unprotected people in the open;

0.3 bar overpressure, corresponding to structures being severely damaged and a probability of death equal to 1.0 for unprotected people in the open;

0.7 bar overpressure, corresponding to an almost entire destruction of buildings and 100% fatality for people in the open.



Table 5-2: Summary of consequences of blast overpressure (Clancey 1972) Pressure (Gauge)

Damage Psi kPa 0.02 0.138 Annoying noise (137 dB), if of low frequency (10 – 15 Hz) 0.03 0.207 Occasional breaking of large glass windows already under strain 0.04 0.276 Loud noise (143 dB); sonic boom glass failure 0.1 0.69 Breakage of small under strain windows 0.15 1.035 Typical pressure for glass failure

0.3 2.07 ‘Safe distance’ (probability 0.95; no serious damage beyond this value); missile limit; some damage to house ceilings; 10% window glass broken

0.4 2.76 Limited minor structural damage

0.5–1.0 3.45–6.9 Large and small windows usually shattered; occasional damage to window frames

0.7 4.83 Minor damage to house structures 1.0 6.9 Partial demolition of houses, made uninhabitable

1.0–2.0 6.9–13.8 Corrugated asbestos shattered; corrugated steel or aluminium panels, fastenings fail, followed by buckling; wood panels (standard housing) fastenings fail, panels blown in

1.3 8.97 Steel frame of clad building slightly distorted 2.0 13.8 Partial collapse of walls and roofs of houses

2.0–3.0 13.8–20.7 Concrete or cinderblock walls (not reinforced) shattered 2.3 15.87 Lower limit of serious structural damage 2.5 17.25 50% destruction of brickwork of house

3.0 20.7 Heavy machines (1.4 t) in industrial building suffered little damage; steel frame building distorted and pulled away from foundations

3.0–4.0 20.7–27.6 Frameless, self-framing steel panel building demolished 4.0 27.6 Cladding of light industrial buildings demolished

5.0 34.5 Wooden utilities poles (telegraph, etc.) snapped; tall hydraulic press (18 t) in building slightly damaged

5.0–7.0 34.5–48.3 Nearly complete destruction of houses 7.0 48.3 Loaded train wagons overturned

7.0–8.0 48.3–55.2 Brick panels (20 – 30 cm) not reinforced fail by shearing or flexure 9.0 62.1 Loaded train boxcars completely demolished

10.0 69.0 Probable total destruction buildings; heavy (3 t) machine tools moved and badly damaged; very heavy (12 000 lb. / 5443 kg) machine tools survived

300 2070 Limit of crater lip



Table 5-3: Damage caused by overpressure effects of an explosion (Stephens 1970)

Equipment Overpressure (psi)

0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 3.5 4 4.5 5 5.5 6 6.5 7 7.5 8 8.5 9 9.5 10 12 14 16 18 20 Control house steel roof A C V N A Windows and gauges break

Control house concrete roof A E P D N B Louvers fall at 0.3–0.5 psi Cooling tower B F O C Switchgear is damaged from roof collapse

Tank: cone roof D K U D Roof collapses Instrument cubicle A LM T E Instruments are damaged

Fire heater G I T F Inner parts are damaged Reactor: chemical A I P T G Bracket cracks

Filter H F V T H Debris-missile damage occurs Regenerator I IP T I Unit moves and pipes break

Tank: floating roof K U D J Bracing fails Reactor: cracking I I T K Unit uplifts (half filled)

Pine supports P SO L Power lines are severed Utilities: gas meter Q M Controls are damaged

Utilities: electric transformer H I T N Block wall fails Electric motor H I V O Frame collapses

Blower Q T P Frame deforms Fractionation column R T Q Case is damaged

Pressure vessel horizontal PI T R Frame cracks Utilities: gas regulator I MQ S Piping breaks

Extraction column I V T T Unit overturns or is destroyed Steam turbine I M S V U Unit uplifts (0.9 filled)

Heat exchanger I T V Unit moves on foundations Tank sphere I I T

Pressure vessel vertical I T Pump I Y



5.3.1 Vapour Cloud Explosions A release of flammable material into the atmosphere could result in the formation of a flash fire, as described in the subsection on flash fires, or a vapour cloud explosion (VCE). The concentration of the combustible component would decrease from the point of release to below the lower explosive limits (LEL), at which concentration the component can no longer ignite. The material contained in the vapour cloud between the higher explosive limits (HEL) and the lower explosive limit (LEL), if it ignites, could form a flash fire or a fireball. The sudden detonation of the explosive mass of material would cause overpressures that can result in injury or damage to property. 5.3.1.1 Bunds Figure 5-14 gives the extent of the 0.1 bar overpressure isopleths, representing a 1% fatality for unprotected people in the open. The thin lines represent the blast overpressure from a northerly wind, while the thicker lines represent the wind from all directions. The 1% fatality of vapour cloud explosions remains mostly within the Vopak site and could extend a short distance to the north, but would remain within the Island View complex.

0.00 0.06 0.12

km

LEGEND SCENARIO 20 000 m3 tanks- Major bund 5 000 m3 tanks - Major bund

Figure 5-14: Blast overpressures of 0.1 bar for vapour cloud explosions resulting from a loss of containment of the flammable storage tanks



5.3.2 Fixed-Roof Tank Explosions A confined gas explosion is where the exploding gas is restricted from expanding by physical barriers, such as walls or equipment and obstacles. A fixed-roof tank explosion is concerned with the explosion within a tank. The explosive mass is calculated as the volume of the tank at its lower flammable limit (LFL). A fixed-roof explosion can only occur if a flammable atmosphere can be formed. For this study, only flammable components with flashpoints lower than 38°C were considered. The 0.1 bar blast overpressures from tank-top explosions are shown in Figure 5-15. The 0.1 bar represents a 1% fatality for people in the open. Fixed-roof tank explosions would not extend beyond the Vopak site boundary.

0.00 0.06 0.12

km

Figure 5-15: The 1% fatality for fixed-roof tank explosions 5.3.3 Boiling Liquid Expanding Vapour Explosions (BLEVEs) A boiling liquid expanding vapour explosion (BLEVE) can occur when a flame impinges on the condensate tankers, particularly in the vapour space region where cooling by evaporation of the contained fluid does not occur. The vessel shell weakens and ruptures, with a total loss of contents, and the issuing mass of material burns as a massive fireball. The major consequences of a BLEVE are the intense thermal radiation from the fireball, a blast wave and fragments from the shattered vessel. These fragments may be projected to considerable distances. Analyses of the travel range of fragment missiles from a number of BLEVEs suggest that the majority land within 700 m from the incident. A blast wave from a BLEVE is fairly localised but can cause significant damage to immediate equipment. No BLEVEs would be expected in the storage areas.



5.4 Summary of Impacts Table 5-4 lists the summary of impacts from worst meteorological conditions at a reference height of 1 m above the ground. Table 5-4: Summary of impacts

Equipment Consequence Value

Max Distance Release Center (m)

Bund 1 (Major) Pool Fires 4 kW/m2 152 (20 000 m3 tanks) 10 kW/m2 68 Flame 51 Flash Fire LFL 85 1/2 LFL 159 Vapour Cloud Explosion 0.03 Bar 291 0.1 Bar 150 0.3 Bar 107 0.7 Bar 92

Bund 1 (Minor bunds) Pool Fires 4 kW/m2 78 (20 000 m3 tanks) 10 kW/m2 34 Flame 25 Flash Fire LFL 52 1/2 LFL 99 Vapour Cloud Explosion 0.03 Bar 180 0.1 Bar 81 0.3 Bar 60 0.7 Bar 56 Bund 2 (Major) Pool Fires 4 kW/m2 91 (5 000 m3 tanks) 10 kW/m2 39 Flame 27 Flash Fire LFL 57 1/2 LFL 110 Vapour Cloud Explosion 0.03 Bar 200 0.1 Bar 105 0.3 Bar 78 0.7 Bar 66 Bund 2 (Minor bunds) Pool Fires 4 kW/m2 51 (5 000 m3 tanks) 10 kW/m2 31 Flame 14 Flash Fire LFL 42 1/2 LFL 78 Vapour Cloud Explosion 0.03 Bar 135 0.1 Bar 63 0.3 Bar 47 0.7 Bar 43



6 RISK ANALYSIS 6.1 Background It is important to understand the difference between hazard and risk. A hazard is anything that has the potential to cause damage to life, property and the environment. Furthermore, it has constant parameters (of petrol, chlorine, ammonia, etc.) that pose the same hazard wherever present. Risk, on the other hand, is the probability that a hazard will actually cause damage along with how severe that damage will be (consequence). Risk is therefore the probability that a hazard will manifest itself. For instance, the risks of a chemical accident or spill depends upon the amount present, the process the chemical is used in, the design and safety features of its container, the exposure, the prevailing environmental and weather conditions and so on. Risk analysis consists of a judgement of probability based on local atmospheric conditions, generic failure rates and the severity of consequences, based on the best available technological information. Risks form an inherent part of modern life. Some risks are readily accepted on a day-to-day basis, while certain hazards attract headlines even when the risk is much smaller, particularly in the field of environmental protection and health. For instance, the risk of one-in-ten-thousand chance of death per year associated with driving a car is acceptable to most people, whereas the much lower risks associated with nuclear facilities (one-in-ten-million chance of death per year) are deemed unacceptable. A report by the British Parliamentary Office of Science and Technology (POST), titled ‘Safety in Numbers? Risk Assessment and Environmental Protection’, explains how public perception of risk is influenced by a number of factors in addition to the actual size of the risk. These factors were summarised as follows in Table 6-1. Table 6-1: The influence of public perception of risk on the acceptance of that

risk, based on the POST report

Control People are more willing to accept risks they impose upon themselves or they consider to be ‘natural’ than to have risks imposed upon them

Dread and Scale of Impact

Fear is greatest where the consequences of a risk are likely to be catastrophic rather than spread over time

Familiarity People appear more willing to accept risks that are familiar rather than new risks

Timing Risks seem to be more acceptable if the consequences are immediate or short term, rather than if they are delayed (especially if they might

affect future generations) Social

Amplification and Attenuation

Concern can be increased because of media coverage, graphic depiction of events or reduced by economic hardship

Trust

A key factor is how far the public trusts regulators, policy makers or industry; if these bodies are open and accountable (being honest as

well as admitting mistakes and limitations and taking account of differing views without disregarding them as emotive or irrational), then

the public is more likely consider them credible



A risk assessment should be seen as an important component of ongoing preventative actions, aimed at minimising or hopefully avoiding accidents. Reassessments of risk should therefore follow at regular intervals and after any changes that could alter the nature of the hazard, so contributing to the overall prevention programme and emergency response plan of the plant. Risks should be ranked in decreasing severity and the top risks reduced to acceptable levels. Procedures for predictive hazard evaluation have been developed for the analysis of processes when evaluating very low probability accidents with very high consequences (for which there is little or no experience) as well as more likely releases with fewer consequences (for which there may be more information available). These address both the probability of an accident as well as the magnitude and nature of undesirable consequences of that accident. Risk is usually defined as some simple function of both the probability and consequence. 6.2 Predicted Risk The physical and consequence modelling (Section 5) addresses the impact of a release of hazardous materials without taking into account the probability of occurrence. This merely illustrates the significance and the extent of the impact in the event of a release. Section 5 also contains an analysis of the possibility of cascading or knock-on effects due to incidents in the facility and the surrounding industries and suburbs. In Section 6 the likelihood of various incidents is assessed, the consequences calculated and finally the risk for the facility is determined.



6.2.1 Generic Equipment Failure Scenarios In order to characterise the various failure events and assign a failure frequency, fault trees were constructed starting with a final event and working from the top down to define all initiating events and frequencies. The analysis was completed using published failure rate data. Equipment failures can occur in tanks, pipelines and other items handling hazardous materials. These failures may result in:

Release of combustible, flammable and explosive components with fires or explosions upon ignition;

Release of toxic components. 6.2.1.1 Storage Tanks Incidents involving storage tanks include catastrophic failure leading to product leakage into the bund and a possible bund fire. A tank-roof failure could result in a possible tank fire. A fracture of the tank nozzle or the transfer pipeline could also result in product leakage into the bund and a possible bund fire. Typical failure frequencies for atmospheric tanks and pressure vessels are listed, respectively, in Table 6-2 and Table 6-3. Table 6-2: Failure frequencies for atmospheric tanks

Event Leak Frequency (per item per year)

Small leaks 1x10˗4 Severe leaks 3x10˗5

Catastrophic failure 5x10˗6 Table 6-3: Failure frequencies for pressure vessels

Event Failure Frequency (per item per year)

Small leaks 1x10˗5 Severe leaks 5x10˗7

Catastrophic failure 5x10˗7

6.2.1.2 Human Failure Human error and failure can occur during any life cycle or mode of operation of a facility. In this respect, human failures can be divided into the following categories:

Human failures during design, construction and modification of the facility; Human failure during operation and maintenance; Human failure due to errors of management and administration.

Human failures during design, construction and modification are part of the generic failures given in this subsection. Human failures concerning organisation and management are



influencing factors. Some of the types of tasks that have been evaluated for their rates of human failure are given in Table 6-4. Table 6-4: Human failure rates of specific types of tasks

Tasks Human Failure (events per year)

Totally unfamiliar, performed at speed with no real idea of likely consequences 0.55

Failure to carry out rapid and complex actions to avoid serious incident such as an explosion 0.5

Complex task requiring high level of comprehension and skill 0.16 Failure to respond to audible alarm in control room within 10 minutes 1.0x10˗1

Failure to respond to audible alarm in quiet control room by some more complex action such as going outside and selecting one correct value

among many 1.0x10˗2

Failure to respond to audible alarm in quiet control room by pressing a single button 1.0x10˗3

Omission or incorrect execution of step in a familiar start-up routine 1.0x10˗3 Completing a familiar, well-designed, highly-practiced, routine task

occurring several times per hour, performed to highest possible standards by a highly-motivated, highly-trained and experienced person

totally aware of implications of failures, with time to correct potential error but without the benefit of significant job aids

4.0x10˗4



6.2.1.3 Ignition Probability of Flammable Gases and Liquids The estimation of the probability of an ignition is a key step in the assessment of risk for installations where flammable liquids or gases are stored. There is a reasonable amount of data available relating to characteristics of ignition sources and the effects of release type and location. The probability of ignition for stationary installations is given in Table 6-5 (along with the classification of flammable substances in Table 6-6). These can be replaced with ignition probabilities related to the surrounding activities. For example, the probability of a fire from a flammable release at an open flame would increase to a value of 1. Table 6-5: The probability of direct ignition for stationary installations

(RIVM 2009)

Substance Category Source-Term Continuous

Source-Term Instantaneous

Probability of Direct Ignition

Category 0 Average to high

reactivity

< 10 kg/s 10 – 100 kg/s

> 100 kg/s

< 1000 kg 1000 – 10 000 kg

> 10 000 kg

0.2 0.5 0.7

Category 0 Low reactivity

< 10 kg/s 10 – 100 kg/s

> 100 kg/s

< 1000 kg 1000 – 10 000 kg

> 10 000 kg

0.02 0.04 0.09

Category 1 All flow rates All quantities 0.065 Category 2 All flow rates All quantities 0.00431 Category 3 Category 4 All flow rates All quantities 0

Table 6-6: Classification of flammable substances

Substance Category Description Limits

Category 0 Extremely flammable

Liquids, substances and preparations that have a flashpoint lower than 0°C and a boiling point (or the start of the boiling range) less than or equal to 35°C

Gaseous substances and preparations that may ignite at normal temperature and pressure when

exposed to air

Category 1 Highly flammable

Liquids, substances and preparations that have a flashpoint of below 21°C

Category 2 Flammable Liquids, substances and preparations that have a flashpoint equal to 21°C and less than 55°C

Category 3 Liquids, substances and preparations that have a

flashpoint greater than 55°C and less than or equal to 100°C

Category 4 Liquids, substances and preparations that have a flashpoint greater than 100°C

1 This value is taken from the CPR 18E (1999). RIVM (2009) gives the value of delayed ignition as zero.

RISCOM (PTY) LTD believes the CPR 18E is more appropriate for warmer climates and is a conservative value.



6.3 Risk Calculations 6.3.1 Maximum Individual Risk Parameter Standard individual risk parameters include: average individual risk; weighted individual risk; maximum individual risk; and, the fatal accident rate. The latter parameter is more applicable to occupational exposures. Only the maximum individual risk (MIR) parameter will be used in this assessment. For this parameter the frequency of fatality is calculated for an individual who is presumed to be present at a specified location. This parameter (defined as the consequence of the event multiplied by the likelihood of the event) is not dependent on knowledge of the population at risk. So, it is an easier parameter to use in the predictive mode than the average individual risk and weighted individual risk. The unit of measure is risk of fatality per person per year. 6.3.2 Acceptable Risks The next step, after having characterised a risk and obtained a risk level, is to recommend whether the outcome is acceptable. In contrast to the employees in a plant, who may be assumed to be healthy, the adopted exposure assessment applies to an average population group that also includes sensitive subpopulations. Sensitive subpopulation groups are those people that for reasons of age or medical condition have a greater than normal response to contaminants. Health guidelines and standards used to establish risk normally incorporate safety factors that address this group. Among the most difficult tasks of risk characterisation is the definition of acceptable risk. In an attempt to account for risks in a manner similar to those used in everyday life, the UK Health and Safety Executive (HSE) developed the risk ALARP triangle. Applying the triangle involves deciding:

Whether a risk is so high that something must be done about it; Whether the risk is or has been made so small that no further precautions are

necessary; If a risk falls between these two states that it has been reduced to levels as low as

reasonably practicable (ALARP).



This is illustrated in Figure 6-1. ALARP stands for ‘as low as reasonably practicable’. As used in the UK, it is the region between that which is intolerable, at 1x10˗4 per year, and that which is broadly acceptable, at 1x10˗6 per year/ A further lower level of risk of 3x10˗7 per year is applied to either vulnerable or very large populations for land-use planning.

Figure 6-1: UK HSE decision-making framework



It should be noted that acceptable risks posed to workers are different to those posed to the public. This is due to the fact that workers have personal protection equipment (PPE), are aware of the hazards, are sufficiently mobile to evade or escape the hazards and receive training in preventing injuries. The HSE (UK) gives more detail on the word practicable in the following statement: “ In essence, making sure a risk has been reduced to ALARP is about weighing

the risk against the sacrifice needed to further reduce it. The decision is weighted in favour of health and safety because the presumption is that the duty-holder should implement the risk reduction measure. To avoid having to make this sacrifice, the duty-holder must be able to show that it would be grossly disproportionate to the benefits of risk reduction that would be achieved. Thus, the process is not one of balancing the costs and benefits of measures but, rather, of adopting measures except where they are ruled out because they involve grossly disproportionate sacrifices. Extreme examples might be:

To spend £1m to prevent five staff members suffering bruised knees is

obviously grossly disproportionate; but, To spend £1m to prevent a major explosion capable of killing 150 people is

obviously proportionate. Proving ALARP means that if the risks are lower than 1x10˗4 fatalities per

person per year it can be demonstrated that there would be no more benefit from further mitigation, sometimes using cost benefit analysis. “



6.4 Risk Scenarios The risk for the proposed fuel storage tanks for the Vopak Farewell site, based on the Growth 4 Project and the expected storage inventories, is given in Figure 6-2. The scenarios used to build up the risk profile are given in Appendix F The risk of 1x10˗6 fatalities per person per year isopleth extends beyond the Vopak site boundary, but not beyond the Island View complex. The risks of 1x10-3 fatalities per person per year isopleth is considered the upper bounds for employees and would be located in the onsite area between the two new bunds. The remainder of the Farewell- King site need to be evaluated in conjunction to the proposed improvements to analyse the changes in risk profiles with the inclusion of this project.

LEGEND RISK (fatalities per person per year) 1x10˗3 1x10˗4 1x10˗5 1x10˗6 3x10˗7

Figure 6-2: Combined risk isopleths for the Farewell-King site



6.5 Risk Ranking The scenarios contributing to overall risk were calculated, based on four locations around the proposed fuel tanks shown in Figure 6-3

Figure 6-3: Risk ranking points Scenarios with the highest contribution to the overall risk are given in Table 6-7, Table 6-8, Table 6-9, Table 6-10 for the respective analysis points. In all cases, the overfill scenario is the highest risk. Table 6-7: Scenarios at the North point with highest contribution to the risk value

Scenario Contribution [%] Value

Overfill (Bund 2) 59.2 6.65E-04 Overfill (Bund 1) 38.7 4.35E-04 Serious Leak (Bund 2) 1.07 1.20E-05 Serious Leak (Bund 1) 0.697 7.82E-06 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 2) 0.178 2.00E-06 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 1) 0.116 1.30E-06

Note: Bund 1 – Secondary containment for the 20 000 m3 storage tanks Bund 2 – Secondary containment for the 5 000 m3 storage tanks



Table 6-8: Scenarios at the South point with highest contribution to the risk value


Overfill (Bund 1) 97.9 6.53E-04 Serious Leak (Bund 1) 1.76 1.17E-05 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 1) 0.294 1.96E-06 Overfill (Bund 2) 0.0074 4.93E-08 Serious Leak (Bund 2) 0.000133 8.88E-10 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 2) 2.22E-05 1.48E-10 Table 6-9: Scenarios at the East point with highest contribution to the risk value


Overfill (Bund 1) 97.2 5.57E-04 Serious Leak (Bund 1) 1.75 1.00E-05 Overfill (Bund 2) 0.718 4.11E-06 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 1) 0.292 1.67E-06 Serious Leak (Bund 2) 0.0129 7.40E-08 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 2) 0.00215 1.23E-08 Table 6-10: Scenarios at the West point with highest contribution to the risk value


Overfill (Bund 1) 94.5 5.34E-04 Overfill (Bund 2) 3.43 1.94E-05 Serious Leak (Bund 1) 1.7 9.61E-06 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 1) 0.284 1.60E-06 Serious Leak (Bund 2) 0.0617 3.49E-07 Catastrophic Failure (Bund 2) 0.0103 5.81E-08



7 CONCLUSIONS Risk calculations are not precise. The accuracy of the predictions is determined by the quality of base data and expert judgements. A number of well-known sources of incident data were consulted and applied to obtain the likelihood of an incident to occur. The risk assessment included the consequences of fires and explosions at the Vopak facility in Island View. The risk assessment was done on the assumption that the site is maintained to an acceptable level and that all statuary regulations are applied. It was also assumed that the detailed engineering designs were done by competent people and are correctly specified for the intended duty. For example, it is assumed that the tank wall thicknesses have been correctly calculated, that the vents have been sized for emergency conditions, that the instrumentation and electrical components comply with the specified electrical area classification, that the material of construction is compatible with the products, etc. It is the responsibility of Vopak and their contractors to ensure that all engineering designs have been completed by competent persons and that all equipment has been installed correctly. All designs should be in full compliance (but not limited) to the Occupational Health and Safety Act 85 of 1993 and its regulations, the National Buildings Regulations and the Buildings Standards Act 107 of 1977 as well as local bylaws. A number of incident scenarios were simulated, taking into account the prevailing meteorological conditions, and described in the report. 7.1 Notifiable Substances The General Machinery Regulation 8 and its Schedule A on notifiable substances requires any employer who has a substance equal to or exceeding the quantity as listed in the regulation to notify the divisional director. A site is classified as a Major Hazard Installation if it contains one or more notifiable substances or if the off-site risk is sufficiently high. The latter can only be determined from a quantitative risk assessment. No product stored on the Vopak site would be classified as notifiable.

7.2 Fires The proposed project of 6 x 20 000 m3 and 6 x 5 000 m3 tanks could contain either diesel or petrol. The risk assessment was based on the worst case scenario of petrol, having a higher flash point. Pool and flash fires from a loss of containment and ignition at the storage area were simulated. Large pool fires could damage surround tanks, but impacts to people would largely remain on site with impacts extending a short distance to the north and south of the site. However, the impacts would not extend beyond the Island View complex. Flash fires from a loss of containment of petrol within the bunded area would be expected to remain on site with the limit to the ½ LFL having the possibility to extend beyond the site boundary, but not the Island View complex.



No jet fires would be expected, as there are no pressurised flammable materials stored on site. 7.3 Explosions Vapour cloud explosions from spilt materials as well as tank explosions were simulated. Vapour cloud explosions could have offsite impacts. However, the 1% fatality for people in the open would remain within the Vopak boundary, with the exception to a short distance beyond the northern boundary. Tank explosions have potential to impact adjacent tanks, but would not have little impact beyond the site boundary. 7.4 Impacts onto Neighbouring Properties, Residential Areas and Major Hazard

Installations Known MHIs, such as Nalco’s, and Transnet NMPP) could experience impacts, including potential fatalities and knock-on effects due to fire and explosion hazards. The risks to workers from such releases are considered tolerable.

7.5 Major Hazard Installation It should be noted that Section 2 of the MHI regulations applies only if the risk posed by the installation poses a risk to both workers and the public. The definition of a worker under the OHS Act No. 85 of 1993 is that a worker receives remuneration and works under supervision. As all personnel entering the Island View complex do so at the access point and have business within the secured complex, such personnel would be considered workers under that definition. The risk for the proposed project would have the 1x10˗6 fatalities per person per year isopleth extends a short distance beyond the Vopak site boundary, but not Island View complex. As the general public is located beyond the Island View complex boundary, the public would not be impacted by the proposed developments. While the proposed project alone, would not make the site a MHI, the classification would need to be evaluated from the full site risk assessment.



8 RECOMMENDATIONS As a result of the risk assessment study conducted for the Growth 4 fuel Project at the Vopak facility in Island View some events were found to have risks beyond the site boundary. These risks could be mitigated to acceptable levels, as shown in the report. RISCOM did not find any fatal flaws that would prevent the project proceeding to the detailed engineering phase of the project. RISCOM would support the project with the following conditions: 1. Compliance with all statutory requirements, i.e. pressure vessel designs; 2. Compliance with applicable SANS codes, i.e. SANS 10087, SANS 10089,

SANS 10108, etc.; 3. Incorporation of applicable guidelines or equivalent international recognised codes of

good design and practice into the designs; 4. Completion of a recognised process hazard analysis (such as a HAZOP study,

FMEA, etc.) on the proposed facility prior to construction to ensure design and operational hazards have been identified and adequate mitigation put in place;

5. Full compliance with IEC 61508 and IEC 61511 (Safety Instrument Systems) standards or equivalent to ensure that adequate protective instrumentation is included in the design and would remain valid for the full life cycle of the tank farm:

6. Demonstration by Vopak or their contractor that the final designs would reduce the risks posed by the installation to internationally acceptable guidelines;

7. Signature of all engineering designs by a professional engineer registered in South Africa in accordance with the Professional Engineers Act, who takes responsibility for suitable designs;

8. Completion of an emergency preparedness and response document for on-site and off-site scenarios prior to initiating the MHI risk assessment (with input from local authorities);

9. Final acceptance of the facility risks with an MHI risk assessment that must be completed in accordance to the MHI regulations and that the risk assessment covers the entire facility:



9 REFERENCES AICHE (1985). Guidelines for Hazard Evaluation Procedures. American Institute of Chemical Engineers. CLANCEY (1972). Diagnostic Features of Explosion Damage. Edinburgh: Sixth International Meeting of Forensic Sciences. CPR 14E (1997). Methods for the Calculation of Physical Effects (“Yellow Book”). Third Edition. Apeldoorn: TNO. CPR 16E (1992). Methods for the Determination of Possible Damage (“Green Book”). First Edition. Apeldoorn: TNO. CPR 18E (1999). Guidelines for Quantitative Risk Assessment (“Purple Book”). First Edition, Apeldoorn: TNO. COX, A. W, LEES, F. P. and ANG, M.L. (1990). Classification of Hazardous Locations. British Institution of Chemical Engineers. DOL (2001). Occupation Health and Safety Act, 1993: Major Hazard Installation Regulations (No. R692). Regulation Gazette. No. 7122, Pretoria, Republic of South Africa: Government Gazette. LEES, F. P. (2001). Loss Prevention in the Process Industries. Second Edition. London: Butterworths. RIVM (2009). Reference Manual BEVI Risk Assessments. Edition 3.2. Bilthoven, the Netherlands: National Institute of Public Health and the Environment (RIVM). STEPHENS, M. (1970). Minimizing Damage to Refineries. US Dept. of the Interior, Offices of Oil and Gas.



10 ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS

AIA See Approved Inspection Authority ALARP The UK Health and Safety Executive (HSE) developed the risk ALARP

triangle, in an attempt to account for risks in a manner similar to those used in everyday life. This involved deciding:

Whether a risk is so high that something must be done about it; Whether the risk is or has been made so small that no further

precautions are necessary; Whether a risk falls between these two states and has been

reduced to levels ‘as low as reasonably practicable’ (ALARP). Reasonable practicability involves weighing a risk against the trouble, time and money needed to control it.

Approved Inspection Authority

An approved inspection authority (AIA) is defined in the Major Hazard Installation regulations (July 2001)

Asphyxiant An asphyxiant is a gas that is nontoxic but may be fatal if it accumulates in a confined space and is breathed at high concentrations since it replaces oxygen containing air.

Blast Overpressure

Blast overpressure is a measure used in the multi-energy method to indicate the strength of the blast, indicated by a number ranging from 1 (for very low strengths) up to 10 (for detonative strength).

BLEVE Boiling liquid expanding vapour explosions result from the sudden failure of a vessel containing liquid at a temperature above its boiling point. A BLEVE of flammables results in a large fireball.

Deflagration Deflagration is a chemical reaction of a substance, in which the reaction front advances into the unreacted substance at less than sonic velocity.

Detonation Detonation is a release of energy caused by extremely rapid chemical reaction of a substance, in which the reaction front of a substance is determined by compression beyond the auto-ignition temperature.

Emergency Plan

An emergency plan is a plan in writing that describes how potential incidents identified at the installation together with their consequences should be dealt with, both on site and off site.

ERPG Emergency response planning guidelines were developed by the American Industrial Hygiene Association. ERPG-1 is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing anything other than mild transient adverse health effects or perceiving a clearly defined objectionable odour. ERPG-2 is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing irreversible or other serious health effects or symptoms that could impair their abilities to take protective action. ERPG-3 is the maximum airborne concentration below which it is believed nearly all individuals could be exposed for up to 1 hour without experiencing or developing life-threatening health effects.

Explosion An explosion is a release of energy that causes a pressure discontinuity or blast wave.

Flammable Limits

Flammable limits are a range of gas or vapour concentrations in the air that will burn or explode if a flame or other ignition source is present. The



lower point of the range is called the lower flammable limit (LFL). Likewise, the upper point of the range is called the upper flammable limit (UFL).

Flammable Liquid

The Occupational Health and Safety Act 85 of 1993 defines a flammable liquid as any liquid which produces a vapour that forms an explosive mixture with air and includes any liquid with a closed cup flashpoint of less than 55°C. Flammable products have been classified according to their flashpoints and boiling points, which ultimately determine the propensity to ignite. Separation distances described in the various codes are dependent on the flammability classification. Class Description 0 Liquefied petroleum gas (LPG) IA Liquids that have a closed cup flashpoint of below 23°C and a

boiling point below 35°C IB Liquids that have a closed cup flashpoint of below 23°C and a

boiling point of 35°C or above IC Liquids that have a closed cup flashpoint of 23°C and above but

below 38°C II Liquids that have a closed cup flashpoint of 38°C and above but

below 60.5°C IIA Liquids that have a closed cup flashpoint of 60.5°C and above but

below 93°C

Flash Fire A flash fire is defined as combustion of a flammable vapour and air mixture in which the flame passes through the mixture at a rate less than sonic velocity so that negligible damaging overpressure is generated.

Frequency Frequency is the number of times an outcome is expected to occur in a given period of time.

IDLH Immediately dangerous to life or health values were developed by the National Institute of Occupational Safety and Health (NIOSH). IDLH value refers to a maximum concentration to which a healthy person may be exposed for 30 minutes and escape without suffering irreversible health effects or symptoms that impair escape (ranging from runny eyes that temporarily impair eyesight to a coma). IDLH values are intended to ensure that workers can escape from a given contaminated environment in the event of failure of the respiratory protection equipment.

Ignition Source An ignition source is a source of temperature and energy sufficient to initiate combustion.

Individual Risk Individual risk is the probability that in one year a person will become a victim of an accident if the person remains permanently and unprotected in a certain location. Often the probability of occurrence in one year is replaced by the frequency of occurrence per year.

Isopleth See Risk Isopleth Jet A jet is the outflow of material emerging from an orifice with significant

momentum. Jet Fire or

Flame A jet fire or flame is combusting material emerging from an orifice with a significant momentum.

LFL Lower Flammable Limit see Flammable Limits LOC See Loss of Containment Local Local government is defined in Section 1 of the Local Government



Government Transition Act, 1993 (Act No. 209 of 1993). Loss of

Containment Loss of containment (LOC) is the event resulting in a release of material into the atmosphere.

Major Hazard Installation

Major Hazard Installation (MHI) means an installation: Where more than the prescribed quantity of any substance is or

may be kept, whether permanently or temporarily; Where any substance is produced, used, handled or stored in

such a form and quantity that it has the potential to cause a major incident (the potential of which will be determined by the risk assessment).

Major Incident A major incident is an occurrence of catastrophic proportions, resulting from the use of plant or machinery or from activities at a workplace. When the outcome of a risk assessment indicates that there is a possibility that the public will be involved in an incident, then the incident is catastrophic.

Material Safety Data Sheet

According to ISO˗11014, a material safety data sheet (MSDS) is a document that contains information on the potential health effects of exposure to chemicals or other potentially dangerous substances and on safe working procedures when handling chemical products. It is an essential starting point for the development of a complete health and safety program. It contains hazard evaluations on the use, storage, handling and emergency procedures related to that material. An MSDS contains much more information about the material than the label and it is prepared by the supplier. It is intended to tell what the hazards of the product are, how to use the product safely, what to expect if the recommendations are not followed, what to do if accidents occur, how to recognize symptoms of overexposure and what to do if such incidents occur.

MHI See Major Hazard Installation MIR Maximum Individual Risk (see Individual Risk)

MSDS See Material Safety Data Sheet OHS Act Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act No. 85 of 1993)

PAC See Protective Action Criteria QRA See Quantitative Risk Assessment

Quantitative Risk

Assessment

A quantitative risk assessment is the process of hazard identification, followed by a numerical evaluation of effects of incidents, both consequences and probabilities and their combination into the overall measure of risk.

Risk Risk is the measure of the consequence of a hazard and the frequency at which it is likely to occur. Risk is expressed mathematically as:

Risk = Consequence x Frequency of Occurrence Risk

Assessment Risk assessment is the process of collecting, organising, analysing, interpreting, communicating and implementing information in order to identify the probable frequency, magnitude and nature of any major incident which could occur at a major hazard installation and the measures required to remove, reduce or control potential causes of such an incident.

Risk Contour See Risk Isopleth Societal Risk Societal risk is risk posed on a societal group who are exposed to a

hazardous activity.



Temporary Installation

A temporary installation is an installation that can travel independently between planned points of departure and arrival for the purpose of transporting any substance and which is only deemed to be an installation at the points of departure and arrival, respectively.

UFL Upper Flammable Limit (see Flammable Limits) Vapour Cloud

Explosion A vapour cloud explosion (VCE) results from ignition of a premixed cloud of a flammable vapour, gas or spray with air, in which flames accelerate to sufficiently high velocities to produce significant overpressure.

VCE See Vapour Cloud Explosion



11 APPENDIX A: DEPARTMENT OF LABOUR CERTIFICATE



12 APPENDIX B: SANAS CERTIFICATES





13 APPENDIX C: ECSA REGISTRATION



14 APPENDIX D: NOTIFICATION OF MAJOR HAZARD INSTALLATION Prior to assessment of potential impacts of various accidental spills, reference needs to be made to the legislation, regulations and guidelines governing the operation of the development. Section 1 of the Occupational Health and Safety Act (OHS Act; Act No. 85 of 1993) defines a "major hazard installation" to mean an installation: “ (a) Where more than the prescribed quantity of any substance is or may be kept,

whether permanently or temporarily; (b) Where any substance is produced, processed, used, handled or stored in

such a form and quantity that it has the potential to cause a major incident (our emphasis). “

It should be noted that if either (a) or (b) is satisfied, the Major Hazard Installation (MHI) regulations will apply. The prescribed quantity of a chemical can be found in Section 8(1) of the General Machinery Regulation 8 (our emphasis). A major incident is defined as: "an occurrence of catastrophic proportions, resulting from the use of plant and machinery or from activities at a workplace”. Catastrophic in this context means loss of life and limbs or severe injury to employees or members of the public, particularly those who are in the immediate vicinity (our emphasis). It is important to note that the definition refers to an occurrence, whereas Section 1b) refers to potential to cause a major incident. If potential to cause a major incident exists, then the OHS Act and the Major Hazard Installation regulations will apply (our emphasis). On the 16th of January 1998, the MHI regulations were promulgated under the OHS Act (Act No. 85 of 1993), with a further amendment on the 30th of July 2001. The provisions of the regulations apply to installations that have on their premises a certain quantity of a substance that can pose a significant risk to the health and safety of employees and the public. The scope of application given in Section 2 of the MHI regulations is as follows: “ (1) Subject to the provisions of Subregulation (3) these regulations shall apply to

employers, self-employed persons and users, who have on their premises, either permanently or temporarily, a major hazard installation or a quantity of a substance which may pose a risk that could affect the health and safety of employees and the public (our emphasis);

(2) These regulations shall apply to local governments, with specific reference to Regulation 9. “

It is important to note that the regulations refer to a substance, and furthermore the regulations are applicable to risks posed by the substance and NOT merely the potential consequences (our emphasis).



The regulations essentially consist of six parts, namely: 1. Duties for notification of a Major Hazard Installation (existing or proposed), including:

a. Fixed (see List 1); b. Temporary installations;

2. Minimum requirements for a quantitative risk assessment (see List 2); 3. Requirements of an on-site emergency plan (see List 3); 4. Reporting steps of risk and emergency occurrences (see List 4); 5. General duties required of suppliers; 6. General duties required of local government.

Notification of installation (List 1) indicates that:

Applications need to be made in writing to the relevant local authority and the provincial director for permission:

o To erect any Major Hazard Installation; o Prior to the modification of any existing installation that may significantly increase

risk related to it (e.g. an increase in storage or production capacity or alteration of a process);

Applications need to include the following information: o The physical address of installation; o Complete material safety data sheets of all hazardous substances; o The maximum quantity of each substance envisaged to be on premises at any

one time; o The risk assessment of the installation (see List 2); o Any further information that may be deemed necessary by an inspector in

interests of health and safety to the public; Applications need to be advertised in at least one newspaper serving the surrounding

communities and by way of notices posted within these communities.



The risk assessment (List 2):

Is the process of collecting, organising, analysing, interpreting, communicating and implementing information in order to identify the probable frequency, magnitude and nature of any major incident which could occur at a Major Hazard Installation and measures required to remove, reduce or control the potential causes of such an incident;

Needs to be undertaken at intervals not exceeding 5 years and needs to be submitted to the relevant local emergency services;

Must be made available in copies to the relevant health and safety committee, with 60 days given to comment thereon and the results of the assessment made available to any relevant representative or committee to comment thereon;

Should be undertaken by competent person(s) and include the following: o A general process description; o A description of major incidents associated with this type of installation and

consequences of such incidents (including potential incidents); o An estimation of the probability of a major incident; o The on-site emergency plan; o An estimation of the total result in the case of an explosion; o An estimation of the effects of thermal radiation in the case of fire; o An estimation of concentration effects in the case of a toxic release; o Potential effects of a major incident on an adjacent major hazard installation or

part thereof; o Potential effects of a major incident on any other installation, members of the

public (including all persons outside the premises) and on residential areas; o Meteorological tendencies; o Suitability of existing emergency procedures for risks identified; o Any requirements laid down in terms of the Environmental Conservation Act of

1989 (Act No. 73 of 1989); o Any organisational measures that may be required;

The employer shall ensure that the risk assessment is of an acceptable standard and shall be reviewed should:

o It be suspected that the preceding assessment is no longer valid; o Changes in the process that affect hazardous substances; o Changes in the process that involve a substance that resulted in the installation

being classified a Major Hazard Installation or in the methods, equipment or procedures for the use, handling or processing of that substance;

o Incidents that have brought the emergency plan into operation and may affect the existing risk assessment;

Must be made available at a time and place and in a manner agreed upon between parties for scrutiny by any interested person that may be affected by the activities.



Requirements related to the on-site emergency plan (List 3) are:

After submission of the notification, the following shall be established: o An on-site emergency plan must be made available and must be followed inside

the premises of the installation or the part of the installation classified as a Major Hazard Installation, in consultation with the relevant health and safety representative or committee;

o The on-site emergency plan must be discussed with the relevant local government, taking into consideration any comment on the risk related to the health and safety of the public;

o The on-site emergency plan must be reviewed and where necessary updated, in consultation with the relevant local government, at least once every three years;

o A copy of the on-site emergency plan must be signed in the presence of two witnesses, who shall attest the signature;

o The on-site emergency plan must be readily available at all times for implementation and use;

o All employees must be conversant with the on-site emergency plan; o The on-site emergency plan must be tested in practice at least once a year, and a

record must be kept of such testing; Any employer, self-employed person and user owning or in control of a pipeline that

could pose a threat to the general public shall inform the relevant local government and shall be jointly responsible with the relevant local government for establishment and implementation of an on-site emergency plan.

In reporting of risk and emergency occurrences (List 4):

Following an emergency occurrence, the user of the installation shall: o Subject to the provisions of Regulation 6 of the General Administrative

Regulations, within 48 hours by means of telephone, facsimile or similar means of communication, inform the chief inspector, the provincial director and relevant local government of the occurrence of a major incident or an incident that brought the emergency plan into operation or any near miss;

o Submit a report in writing to the chief inspector, provincial director and local government within seven days;

o Investigate and record all near misses in a register kept on the premises, which shall at all times be available for inspection by an inspector and local government representatives.



The duties of the supplier refer specifically to:

Supplying of material safety data sheets for hazardous substances employed or contemplated at the installation;

Assessment of the circumstances and substance involved in an incident or potential incident and the informing all persons being supplied with that substance of the potential dangers surrounding it;

Provision of a service that shall be readily available on a 24-hour basis to all employers, self-employed persons, users, relevant local government and any other body concerned to provide information and advice in the case of a major incident with regard to the substance supplied.

The duties of local government are summarised as follows: “ 9. (1) Without derogating from the provisions of the National Building Regulations

and Building Standards Act of 1977 (Act No. 103 of 1977), no local government shall permit the erection of a new major hazard installation at a separation distance less than that which poses a risk to:

(a) Airports; (b) Neighbouring independent major hazard installations; (c) Housing and other centres of population; or, (d) Any other similar facility… Provided that the local government shall permit new property development

only where there is a separation distance which will not pose a risk (our emphasis) in terms of the risk assessment: Provided further that the local government shall prevent any development adjacent to an installation that will result in that installation being declared a major hazard installation.

(2) Where a local government does not have facilities available to control a major

incident or to comply with the requirements of this regulation that local government shall make prior arrangements with a neighbouring local government, relevant provincial government or the employer, self-employed person and user for assistance…

(3) All off-site emergency plans to be followed outside the premises of the

installation or part of the installation classified as a major hazard installation shall be the responsibility of the local government… ”



15 APPENDIX E: REFERENCE DRAWINGS Typical tank drawings relevant to the report are listed in Table 15-1 and attached in this appendix. Table 15-1: Reference drawings

Drawing No. Title Rev

17549-G-PID-022 GROWTH 4 BUND FW-2

FUEL TANKS A

17549-G-PID-025 GROWTH 4 BUND FW-1

FUEL TANKS A



16 APPENDIX F: INCIDENT SCENARIOS 16.1 Catastrophic Failure of Tanks 16.1.1 Bund Fires

Scenario No. Equip Component

Flash Point (°C)

Event Frequency

(per annum)

System Reaction

1

System Reaction

1 Prob.

System Reaction

2

System Reaction

2 Prob.

Prob. of

Ignition

Total System Event

Frequency (per annum)

PF-1 T075 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-2 T076 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-3 T077 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-4 T078 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-5 T079 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-6 T080 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-7 T081 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-8 T082 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-9 T083 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-10 T084 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-11 T085 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07 PF-12 T086 ULP -40 5.00E-06 None 1 None 1 0.065 3.25E-07



16.1.2 Flash Fires

Scenario

No. Equip

. Component Flash Point (°C)

Event Frequency (per annum

)

System Reaction

1

System Reaction

1 Prob.

System Reaction

2

System Reaction

2 Prob.

Prob. of

Ignition

Total System Event

Frequency (per annum

) FF-1 T075 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-2 T076 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-3 T077 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-4 T078 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-5 T079 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-6 T080 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-7 T081 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-8 T082 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-9 T083 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 FF-10 T084 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 PF-11 T085 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07 PF-12 T085 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 1.95E-07



16.1.2.1 Vapour Cloud Explosions

Scenario No. Equip. Component

Flash Point (°C)

Event Frequency

(per annum)

System Reaction

1

System Reaction

1 Prob.

System Reaction

2

System Reaction

2 Prob.

Prob. of

Ignition

Total System Event


VCE-1 T075 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-2 T076 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-3 T077 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-4 T078 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-5 T079 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-6 T080 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-7 T081 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-8 T082 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-9 T083 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-10 T084 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-11 T085 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07 VCE-12 T086 ULP -40 5.00E-06 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 1.30E-07



16.2 Tank Overfill 16.2.1 Bund Fires


Flash Point (°C)

Event Frequency

(per annum)

System Reaction

1

System Reaction

1 Prob.

System Reaction

2

System Reaction

2 Prob.

Prob. of

Ignition

Total System Event


PF-100 T075 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-101 T075 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-102 T076 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-103 T077 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-104 T078 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-105 T079 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-106 T080 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-107 T081 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-108 T082 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-109 T083 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-110 T084 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-111 T085 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04 PF-112 T086 ULP -40 1.00E-02 None 1 None 1 0.065 6.50E-04



16.2.2 Flash Fires


Flash Point (°C)

Event Frequency

(per annum)

System Reaction

1

System Reaction

1 Prob.

System Reaction

2

System Reaction

2 Prob.

Prob. of

Ignition

Total System Event


FF-100 T075 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-101 T075 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-102 T076 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-103 T077 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-104 T078 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-105 T079 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-106 T080 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-107 T081 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-108 T082 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-109 T083 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-110 T084 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-111 T085 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04 FF-112 T086 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Frac Flash Fire 0.6 None 1 0.065 3.90E-04



16.2.3 Vapour Cloud Explosions


Flash Point (°C)

Event Frequency (per annum

)

System Reaction

1

System Reaction

1 Prob.

System Reaction

2

System Reaction

2 Prob.

Prob. of

Ignition

Total System Event

Frequency (per annum

) VCE-100 T075 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-101 T075 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-102 T076 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-103 T077 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-104 T078 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-105 T079 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-106 T080 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-107 T081 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-108 T082 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-109 T083 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-110 T084 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-111 T085 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04 VCE-112 T086 ULP -40 1.00E-02 Prob VCE 0.4 None 1 0.065 2.60E-04



17 APPENDIX G: MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS

17.1 Unleaded Petrol (ULP)



17.2 Diesel

Shell V-Power DieselVersion 3.1

Effective Date 13.05.2011

Material Safety Data Sheet according to EC directive 2001/58/EC

1/10 Print Date 15.05.2011 MSDS_ZA

1. IDENTIFICATION OF THE SUBSTANCE/PREPARATION AND COMPANY/UNDERTAKING

Material Name : Shell V-Power Diesel Uses : Fuel for on-road diesel-powered engines. Product Code : 002D0075

Manufacturer/Supplier : Shell South Africa Marketing (Pty) LtdThe Campus Twickenham 57 Sloane Street Bryanston 2021 South Africa

Telephone : (+27) 08604674355 Fax : (+27) 0214211308 Email Contact for MSDS

: [email protected]

Emergency Telephone Number

: 011 608 3300 (including poison information).Netcare (for life-threatening emergencies) - 082 911.

2. HAZARDS IDENTIFICATION

EC Classification : Carcinogenic, category 3. Harmful. Irritant.Dangerous for the environment.

Health Hazards : Limited evidence of carcinogenic effect. Harmful by inhalation.

Slightly irritating to respiratory system. Irritating to skin. Harmful: may cause lung damage if swallowed.

Signs and Symptoms : If material enters lungs, signs and symptoms may include coughing, choking, wheezing, difficulty in breathing, chest congestion, shortness of breath, and/or fever. The onset of respiratory symptoms may be delayed for several hours after exposure.

Skin irritation signs and symptoms may include a burning sensation, redness, or swelling.

Safety Hazards : May ignite on surfaces at temperatures above auto-ignition temperature. Vapour in the headspace of tanks and containers may ignite and explode at temperatures exceeding auto-ignition temperature, where vapour concentrations are within the flammability range. Not classified as flammable but will burn. Electrostatic charges may be generated during pumping. Electrostatic discharge may cause fire.





Environmental Hazards : Toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.

Additional Information : This product is intended for use in closed systems only.

3. COMPOSITION/INFORMATION ON INGREDIENTS

Preparation Description : Complex mixture of hydrocarbons consisting of paraffins, cycloparaffins, aromatic and olefinic hydrocarbons with carbon numbers predominantly in the C9 to C25 range. May also contain several additives at <0.1% v/v each. May contain cetane improver (Ethyl Hexyl Nitrate) at <0.2% v/v.

May contain catalytically cracked oils in which polycyclic aromatic compounds, mainly 3-ring but some 4- to 6-ring species are present.

Hazardous Components

Chemical Identity CAS EINECS Symbol(s) R-phrase(s) Conc.Fuels, diesel 68334-30-5 269-822-7 Xn, N, Xi R20; R38;

R40; R65;R51/53

70,00 - 100,00 %

Distillates (Fischer-Tropsch) C8-26 - Branched and Linear

848301-67-7 Xn R65; R66 0,00 - 30,00 %

Additional Information : Dyes and markers can be used to indicate tax status and prevent fraud. Refer to chapter 16 for full text of EC R-phrases.

4. FIRST AID MEASURES

Inhalation : Remove to fresh air. If rapid recovery does not occur, transport to nearest medical facility for additional treatment.

Skin Contact : Remove contaminated clothing. Immediately flush skin with large amounts of water for at least 15 minutes, and follow by washing with soap and water if available. If redness, swelling, pain and/or blisters occur, transport to the nearest medical facility for additional treatment. When using high pressure equipment, injection of product under the skin can occur. If high pressure injuries occur, the casualty should be sent immediately to a hospital. Do not wait for symptoms to develop.

Eye Contact : Flush eye with copious quantities of water. If persistent irritation occurs, obtain medical attention.

Ingestion : If swallowed, do not induce vomiting: transport to nearest medical facility for additional treatment. If vomiting occurs spontaneously, keep head below hips to prevent aspiration. If any of the following delayed signs and symptoms appear within the next 6 hours, transport to the nearest medical facility: fever greater than 101° F (38.3°C), shortness of breath, chest congestion or continued coughing or wheezing. Give nothing





by mouth.Advice to Physician : Treat symptomatically.

5. FIRE FIGHTING MEASURES

Clear fire area of all non-emergency personnel.

Specific Hazards : Hazardous combustion products may include: A complex mixture of airborne solid and liquid particulates and gases (smoke). Carbon monoxide. Oxides of sulphur. Unidentified organic and inorganic compounds. Carbon monoxide may be evolved if incomplete combustion occurs. Will float and can be reignited on surface water. Flammable vapours may be present even at temperatures below the flash point.

Suitable Extinguishing Media

: Foam, water spray or fog. Dry chemical powder, carbon dioxide, sand or earth may be used for small fires only.

Unsuitable Extinguishing Media

: Do not use direct water jets on the burning product as they could cause a steam explosion and spread of the fire. Simultaneous use of foam and water on the same surface is to be avoided as water destroys the foam.

Protective Equipment for Firefighters

: Wear full protective clothing and self-contained breathing apparatus.

Additional Advice : Keep adjacent containers cool by spraying with water.

6. ACCIDENTAL RELEASE MEASURES

Avoid contact with spilled or released material. For guidance on selection of personal protective equipment see Chapter 8 of this Material Safety Data Sheet. See Chapter 13 for information on disposal. Observe the relevant local and international regulations. Evacuate the area of all non-essential personnel. Ventilate contaminated area thoroughly.

Protective measures : Do not breathe fumes, vapour. Do not operate electrical equipment. Shut off leaks, if possible without personal risks. Remove all possible sources of ignition in the surrounding area. Use appropriate containment (of product and fire fighting water) to avoid environmental contamination. Prevent from spreading or entering drains, ditches or rivers by using sand, earth, or other appropriate barriers. Attempt to disperse the vapour or to direct its flow to a safe location for example by using fog sprays. Take precautionary measures against static discharge. Ensure electrical continuity by bonding and grounding (earthing) all equipment.

Clean Up Methods : For small liquid spills (< 1 drum), transfer by mechanical means to a labelled, sealable container for product recovery or safe disposal. Allow residues to evaporate or soak up with an appropriate absorbent material and dispose of safely. Remove contaminated soil and dispose of safely. For large liquid spills (> 1 drum), transfer by mechanical means such as vacuum truck to a salvage tank for recovery or safe disposal. Do not flush away residues with water. Retain as contaminated waste. Allow residues to evaporate or soak up with an appropriate absorbent material and dispose of safely.





Remove contaminated soil and dispose of safely. Shovel into a suitable clearly marked container for disposal or reclamation in accordance with local regulations.

Additional Advice : Notify authorities if any exposure to the general public or the environment occurs or is likely to occur. Local authorities should be advised if significant spillages cannot be contained. Maritime spillages should be dealt with using a Shipboard Oil Pollution Emergency Plan (SOPEP), as required by MARPOL Annex 1 Regulation 26.

7. HANDLING AND STORAGE

General Precautions : Avoid breathing vapours or contact with material. Only use in well ventilated areas. Wash thoroughly after handling. For guidance on selection of personal protective equipment see Chapter 8 of this Material Safety Data Sheet. Use the information in this data sheet as input to a risk assessment of local circumstances to help determine appropriate controls for safe handling, storage and disposal of this material. Air-dry contaminated clothing in a well-ventilated area before laundering. Properly dispose of any contaminated rags or cleaning materials in order to prevent fires. Prevent spillages.Use local exhaust ventilation if there is risk of inhalation of vapours, mists or aerosols. Never siphon by mouth.Contaminated leather articles including shoes cannot be decontaminated and should be destroyed to prevent reuse. Forcomprehensive advice on handling, product transfer, storage and tank cleaning refer to the product supplier.

Maintenance and Fuelling Activities - Avoid inhalation of vapours and contact with skin.

Handling : Avoid inhaling vapour and/or mists. Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with skin. When using do not eat or drink.Extinguish any naked flames. Do not smoke. Remove ignition sources. Avoid sparks. Earth all equipment. Electrostatic charges may be generated during pumping. Electrostatic discharge may cause fire. The vapour is heavier than air, spreads along the ground and distant ignition is possible.

Storage : Drum and small container storage: Drums should be stacked to a maximum of 3 high. Use properly labelled and closeable containers. Tank storage: Tanks must be specifically designed for use with this product. Bulk storage tanks should be diked (bunded). Locate tanks away from heat and other sources of ignition. Must be stored in a diked (bunded) well-ventilated area, away from sunlight, ignition sources and other sources of heat. Vapours from tanks should not be released to atmosphere. Breathing losses during storage should be controlled by a suitable vapour treatment system. The vapour is heavier than air. Beware of accumulation in pits and confined spaces.

Keep in a bunded area with a sealed (low permeability) floor, to provide containment against spillage. Prevent ingress of water.

Product Transfer : Avoid splash filling. Wait 2 minutes after tank filling (for tanks





such as those on road tanker vehicles) before opening hatches or manholes. Wait 30 minutes after tank filling (for large storage tanks) before opening hatches or manholes. Keepcontainers closed when not in use. Do not use compressed air for filling, discharging or handling. Contamination resulting from product transfer may give rise to light hydrocarbon vapour in the headspace of tanks that have previously contained gasoline. This vapour may explode if there is a source of ignition. Partly filled containers present a greater hazard than those that are full, therefore handling, transfer and sampling activities need special care.

Recommended Materials : For containers, or container linings use mild steel, stainless steel. Aluminium may also be used for applications where it does not present an unnecessary fire hazard. Examples of suitable materials are: high density polyethylene (HDPE) and Viton (FKM), which have been specifically tested for compatibility with this product. For container linings, use amine-adduct cured epoxy paint. For seals and gaskets use: graphite, PTFE, Viton A, Viton B.

Unsuitable Materials : Some synthetic materials may be unsuitable for containers or container linings depending on the material specification and intended use. Examples of materials to avoid are: natural rubber (NR), nitrile rubber (NBR), ethylene propylene rubber (EPDM), polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA), polystyrene, polyvinyl chloride (PVC), polyisobutylene. However, some may be suitable for glove materials.

Container Advice : Containers, even those that have been emptied, can contain explosive vapours. Do not cut, drill, grind, weld or perform similar operations on or near containers.

Additional Information : Ensure that all local regulations regarding handling and storage facilities are followed.

8. EXPOSURE CONTROLS/PERSONAL PROTECTION

If the American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienists (ACGIH) value is provided on this document, it is provided for information only.

Occupational Exposure Limits

Material Source Type ppm mg/m3 Notation Fuels, diesel ACGIH TWA

[Inhalablefraction and vapor.]

100 mg/m3 as total hydrocarbons

ACGIH SKIN_DES [Inhalablefraction and vapor.]

Can be absorbed through the skin.as total hydrocarbons

Material Source Hazard Designation





Fuels, diesel ACGIH Confirmed animal carcinogen with unknown relevance to humans.

Exposure Controls : The level of protection and types of controls necessary will vary depending upon potential exposure conditions. Select controls based on a risk assessment of local circumstances. Appropriate measures include: Use sealed systems as far as possible. Adequate ventilation to control airborne concentrations below the exposure guidelines/limits. Localexhaust ventilation is recommended. Eye washes and showers for emergency use.

Personal Protective Equipment

: Personal protective equipment (PPE) should meet recommended national standards. Check with PPE suppliers.

Respiratory Protection : If engineering controls do not maintain airborne concentrations to a level which is adequate to protect worker health, select respiratory protection equipment suitable for the specific conditions of use and meeting relevant legislation. Check with respiratory protective equipment suppliers. Where air-filtering respirators are unsuitable (e.g. airborne concentrations are high, risk of oxygen deficiency, confined space) use appropriate positive pressure breathing apparatus. Where air-filtering respirators are suitable, select an appropriate combination of mask and filter. All respiratory protection equipment and use must be in accordance with local regulations.

Hand Protection : Personal hygiene is a key element of effective hand care. Gloves must only be worn on clean hands. After using gloves, hands should be washed and dried thoroughly. Application of a non-perfumed moisturizer is recommended. Suitability and durability of a glove is dependent on usage, e.g. frequency and duration of contact, chemical resistance of glove material, glove thickness, dexterity. Always seek advice from glove suppliers. Contaminated gloves should be replaced.

Select gloves tested to a relevant standard (e.g. Europe EN374, US F739). When prolonged or frequent repeated contact occurs, Nitrile gloves may be suitable. (Breakthrough time of > 240 minutes.) For incidental contact/splash protection Neoprene, PVC gloves may be suitable.

Eye Protection : Chemical splash goggles (chemical monogoggles). Approved to EU Standard EN166.Protective Clothing : Chemical resistant gloves/gauntlets, boots, and apron (where

risk of splashing).Monitoring Methods : Monitoring of the concentration of substances in the breathing

zone of workers or in the general workplace may be required to confirm compliance with an OEL and adequacy of exposure controls. For some substances biological monitoring may also be appropriate.

Environmental Exposure Controls

: Local guidelines on emission limits for volatile substances must be observed for the discharge of exhaust air containing vapour.

9. PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL PROPERTIES





Appearance : Yellow. Pale straw. Colourless. Liquid.Odour : May contain a reodorant.Initial Boiling Point and Boiling Range

: 170 - 390 °C / 338 - 734 °F

Pour point : <= 6 °C / 43 °FFlash point : > 55 °C / 131 °F Upper / lower Flammability or Explosion limits

: 1,0 - 6,0 %(V)

Auto-ignition temperature : > 220 °C / 428 °FVapour pressure : < 1 hPa at 20 °C / 68 °FDensity : > 0,800 g/cm3 at 20 °C / 68 °Fn-octanol/water partition coefficient (log Pow)

: 3 - 6

Kinematic viscosity : 2,2 - 5,3 mm2/s at 40 °C / 104 °F

10. STABILITY AND REACTIVITY

Stability : Stable under normal conditions of use. Conditions to Avoid : Avoid heat, sparks, open flames and other ignition sources.Materials to Avoid : Strong oxidising agents.Hazardous Decomposition Products

: Hazardous decomposition products are not expected to form during normal storage.

Thermal decomposition is highly dependent on conditions. A complex mixture of airborne solids, liquids and gases, including carbon monoxide, carbon dioxide and other organic compounds will be evolved when this material undergoes combustion or thermal or oxidative degradation.

11. TOXICOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Basis for Assessment : Information given is based on product data, a knowledge of the components and the toxicology of similar products.

Acute Oral Toxicity : Low toxicity: LD50 >2000 mg/kg , Rat Aspiration into the lungs when swallowed or vomited may

cause chemical pneumonitis which can be fatal.Acute Dermal Toxicity : Low toxicity: LD50 >2000 mg/kg , Rabbit Acute Inhalation Toxicity : Moderately toxic: LC50 >1- 5 mg/l / 4 h, Rat

High concentrations may cause central nervous system depression resulting in headaches, dizziness and nausea; continued inhalation may result in unconsciousness and/or death.

Skin Irritation : Irritating to skin.Eye Irritation : Expected to be slightly irritating.Respiratory Irritation : Inhalation of vapours or mists may cause irritation to the

respiratory system.Sensitisation : Not expected to be a skin sensitiser.Repeated Dose Toxicity : Causes damage to organs through prolonged or repeated

exposure. Blood. Thymus. Liver.Mutagenicity : In-vitro mutagenicity studies show that mutagenic activity is

related to 4-6 ring polycyclic aromatic content.Carcinogenicity : Limited evidence of carcinogenic effect. Repeated skin contact has resulted in irritation and skin cancer





in animals.Reproductive and Developmental Toxicity

: Not expected to impair fertility. Not expected to be a developmental toxicant.

12. ECOLOGICAL INFORMATION

Information given is based on a knowledge of the components and the ecotoxicology of similar products. Fuels are typically made from blending several refinery streams. Ecotoxicological studies have been carried out on a variety of hydrocarbon blends and streams but not those containing additives.

Acute Toxicity : Toxic: LL/EL/IL50 1-10 mg/l (to aquatic organisms) (LL/EL50 expressed as the nominal amount of product required to prepare aqueous test extract).

Chronic Toxicity Fish : NOEC/NOEL expected to be > 0.01 - <= 0.1 mg/l (based on

modeled data)Aquatic Invertebrates : NOEC/NOEL expected to be > 0.1 - <= 1.0 mg/l (based on

modeled data)Mobility : Floats on water. Partly evaporates from water or soil surfaces,

but a significant proportion will remain after one day. Largevolumes may penetrate soil and could contaminate groundwater. Contains volatile constituents.

Persistence/degradability : Major constituents are inherently biodegradable. The volatile constituents will oxidize rapidly by photochemical reactions in air.

Bioaccumulation : Contains constituents with the potential to bioaccumulate.

Other Adverse Effects : Films formed on water may affect oxygen transfer and damage organisms.

13. DISPOSAL CONSIDERATIONS

Material Disposal : Recover or recycle if possible. It is the responsibility of the waste generator to determine the toxicity and physical properties of the material generated to determine the proper waste classification and disposal methods in compliance with applicable regulations. Do not dispose into the environment, in drains or in water courses. Do not dispose of tank water bottoms by allowing them to drain into the ground. This will result in soil and groundwater contamination. Waste arising from a spillage or tank cleaning should be disposed of in accordance with prevailing regulations, preferably to a recognised collector or contractor. The competence of the collector or contractor should be established beforehand.

Container Disposal : Send to drum recoverer or metal reclaimer. Drain container thoroughly. After draining, vent in a safe place away from sparks and fire. Residues may cause an explosion hazard if heated above the flash point. Do not puncture, cut or weld uncleaned drums. Do not pollute the soil, water or environment with the waste container. Comply with any local recovery or waste disposal regulations.





Local Legislation : Disposal should be in accordance with applicable regional, national, and local laws and regulations. Local regulations may be more stringent than regional or national requirements and must be complied with.

14. TRANSPORT INFORMATION

IMDG Identification number UN 1202 Proper shipping name DIESEL FUEL Class / Division 3Packing group III Marine pollutant: Yes

IATA (Country variations may apply) UN No. : 1202 Proper shipping name : Diesel fuel Class / Division : 3Packing group : III Environmental Hazard : Environmentally Hazardous

Additional Information : MARPOL Annex 1 rules apply for bulk shipments by sea.

15. REGULATORY INFORMATION

The regulatory information is not intended to be comprehensive. Other regulations may apply to this material.

EC Classification : Carcinogenic, category 3. Harmful. Irritant. Dangerous for the environment.

EC Symbols : Xn Harmful. N Dangerous for the environment.

EC Risk Phrases : R40 Limited evidence of carcinogenic effect. R20 Harmful by inhalation. R38 Irritating to skin. R65 Harmful: may cause lung damage if swallowed. R51/53 Toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic environment.

EC Safety Phrases : S2 Keep out of the reach of children. S36/37 Wear suitable protective clothing and gloves. S61 Avoid release to the environment. Refer to special instructions/Safety data sheets. S62 If swallowed, do not induce vomiting: seek medical advice immediately and show this container or label.

Classification triggering components

: Contains fuels, diesel.





16. OTHER INFORMATION

Additional Information : This document contains important information to ensure the safe storage, handling and use of this product. The information in this document should be brought to the attention of the person in your organisation responsible for advising on safety matters.

R-phrase(s)

R20 Harmful by inhalation. R38 Irritating to skin. R40 Limited evidence of carcinogenic effect. R51/53 Toxic to aquatic organisms, may cause long-term adverse effects in the aquatic

environment. R65 Harmful: may cause lung damage if swallowed. R66 Repeated exposure may cause skin dryness or cracking.

MSDS Version Number : 3.1

MSDS Effective Date : 13.05.2011

MSDS Revisions : A vertical bar (|) in the left margin indicates an amendment from the previous version.

MSDS Regulation : The content and format of this safety data sheet is in accordance with Commission Directive 2001/58/EC of 27 July 2001, amending for the second time Commission Directive 91/155/EEC.

Uses and Restrictions : This product must not be used in applications other than those recommended in Section 1, without first seeking the advice of the supplier. This product is not to be used as a solvent or cleaning agent; for lighting or brightening fires; as a skin cleanser.

MSDS Distribution : The information in this document should be made available to all who may handle the product.

Disclaimer : This information is based on our current knowledge and is intended to describe the product for the purposes of health, safety and environmental requirements only. It should not therefore be construed as guaranteeing any specific property of the product.

Annex D4

Traffic Impact Assessment

•

• •

• •

•

•

•

• • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • • •

• • •

• •

•

•

•

•

• •

•

•

•

•

• • •

• • • • • •

• • • • • • •

•

• •

•

•

•

•

•

• • •

•

• •

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

CLASSIFIED COUNT REPORT Compiled for JG Afrika

Bayhead & South Coast Road

MIKROS TRAFFIC MONITORING KZN (Pty) Ltd

May 2016

Contents Page AM & PM Peak Count 1) Bayhead Road & South Coast Road Intersection

TIME

ENDING Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total

07h00 266 18 284 67 20 87 8 8 16 6 1 7 60 31 91 293 73 366 110 40 150 160 23 183 243 13 256 6 2 8 554 76 630 66 2 68

08h00 286 7 293 52 17 69 12 5 17 12 3 15 88 35 123 121 187 308 87 85 172 130 53 183 315 25 340 7 3 10 439 156 595 51 3 54

09h00 136 28 164 29 24 53 8 5 13 12 3 15 53 57 110 91 178 269 70 108 178 76 68 144 116 37 153 11 6 17 303 157 460 24 7 31

16h30 71 29 100 51 40 91 15 4 19 251 33 284 117 37 154 25 103 128 138 125 263 251 99 350 181 42 223 4 13 17 89 129 218 40 10 50

17h30 60 25 85 45 39 84 9 6 15 134 18 152 80 35 115 23 132 155 140 117 257 283 91 374 288 31 319 0 7 7 102 99 201 43 8 51

18h30 38 19 57 39 38 77 4 9 13 14 4 18 42 40 82 36 136 172 94 97 191 135 93 228 121 26 147 3 8 11 127 91 218 34 4 38

TOTAL 857 126 983 283 178 461 56 37 93 429 62 491 440 235 675 589 809 1398 639 572 1211 1035 427 1462 1264 174 1438 31 39 70 1614 708 2322 258 34 292

From the West - Straight From the West - Right From the East - Right From the South - Left From the North - Right From the East - Straight From the South - Straight From the South - Right From the East - Left From the West - Left

Classified Traffic Count : Bayhead Road & South Coast Road

Date : 24/05/2016 Time Interval : 60 Min

From the North - Left From the North - Straight

N

93 461 994

70

2322 4714

292

1438

2046 1462

1211

491 675 1398

4111

2183

2684

Bayhead Road

1548

Crabtree Road

6 Hour Summary

Bayhead Road

South Coast Road

19642564

TIME From the North - Right From the South - Left From the South - Straight From the South - Right From the East - Left From the East - Straight From the East - Right From the West - Left From the West - Straight From the West - Right

ENDING Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total Light Heavy Total

06h15 3 1 4 6 6 12 2 1 3 1 0 1 12 0 12 69 10 79 45 4 49 76 2 78 53 1 54 0 1 1 86 13 99 6 0 6

06h30 38 5 43 14 5 19 3 2 5 0 1 1 8 6 14 53 15 68 28 6 34 33 3 36 54 4 58 4 1 5 148 27 175 18 2 20

06h45 101 5 106 16 7 23 2 3 5 0 0 0 21 15 36 83 24 107 21 12 33 29 9 38 61 3 64 2 0 2 168 17 185 15 0 15

07h00 124 7 131 31 2 33 1 2 3 5 0 5 19 10 29 88 24 112 16 18 34 22 9 31 75 5 80 0 0 0 152 19 171 27 0 27

TOTAL 266 18 284 67 20 87 8 8 16 6 1 7 60 31 91 293 73 366 110 40 150 160 23 183 243 13 256 6 2 8 554 76 630 66 2 68

07h15 82 3 85 19 7 26 2 1 3 5 1 6 15 4 19 43 38 81 14 16 30 29 9 38 91 7 98 3 0 3 114 39 153 12 0 12

07h30 47 0 47 14 3 17 3 2 5 4 0 4 32 14 46 28 39 67 18 18 36 36 11 47 111 6 117 2 0 2 119 31 150 19 1 20

07h45 82 0 82 12 6 18 4 0 4 2 1 3 18 5 23 20 51 71 27 24 51 30 15 45 66 5 71 1 2 3 115 49 164 15 1 16

08h00 75 4 79 7 1 8 3 2 5 1 1 2 23 12 35 30 59 89 28 27 55 35 18 53 47 7 54 1 1 2 91 37 128 5 1 6

TOTAL 286 7 293 52 17 69 12 5 17 12 3 15 88 35 123 121 187 308 87 85 172 130 53 183 315 25 340 7 3 10 439 156 595 51 3 54

08h15 48 2 50 7 4 11 0 1 1 5 1 6 14 11 25 33 37 70 21 19 40 20 10 30 36 5 41 0 0 0 84 49 133 11 1 12

08h30 34 6 40 3 5 8 2 1 3 1 0 1 11 14 25 23 37 60 13 26 39 17 16 33 27 7 34 8 1 9 78 43 121 4 2 6

08h45 29 11 40 8 8 16 5 1 6 2 1 3 14 18 32 16 55 71 17 35 52 21 24 45 35 14 49 2 3 5 72 35 107 5 1 6

09h00 25 9 34 11 7 18 1 2 3 4 1 5 14 14 28 19 49 68 19 28 47 18 18 36 18 11 29 1 2 3 69 30 99 4 3 7

TOTAL 136 28 164 29 24 53 8 5 13 12 3 15 53 57 110 91 178 269 70 108 178 76 68 144 116 37 153 11 6 17 303 157 460 24 7 31

15h45 18 6 24 14 6 20 5 1 6 62 10 72 16 8 24 7 14 21 35 31 66 66 25 91 53 10 63 2 1 3 27 39 66 11 1 1216h00 24 2 26 12 15 27 2 0 2 74 6 80 22 10 32 8 21 29 34 33 67 63 22 85 31 12 43 0 2 2 18 34 52 6 2 816h15 13 9 22 10 11 21 1 1 2 68 10 78 43 7 50 4 35 39 37 31 68 62 25 87 47 9 56 2 4 6 25 29 54 12 3 15

16h30 16 12 28 15 8 23 7 2 9 47 7 54 36 12 48 6 33 39 32 30 62 60 27 87 50 11 61 0 6 6 19 27 46 11 4 15

TOTAL 71 29 100 51 40 91 15 4 19 251 33 284 117 37 154 25 103 128 138 125 263 251 99 350 181 42 223 4 13 17 89 129 218 40 10 50

16h45 20 3 23 11 11 22 2 0 2 49 5 54 25 8 33 7 32 39 34 28 62 75 20 95 85 13 98 0 1 1 21 24 45 7 3 1017h00 15 9 24 10 16 26 1 2 3 53 11 64 23 3 26 7 40 47 39 25 64 73 22 95 77 6 83 0 1 1 18 19 37 7 2 917h15 14 4 18 16 5 21 4 0 4 28 2 30 19 8 27 4 24 28 35 31 66 70 25 95 71 7 78 0 4 4 37 32 69 19 3 22

17h30 11 9 20 8 7 15 2 4 6 4 0 4 13 16 29 5 36 41 32 33 65 65 24 89 55 5 60 0 1 1 26 24 50 10 0 10

TOTAL 60 25 85 45 39 84 9 6 15 134 18 152 80 35 115 23 132 155 140 117 257 283 91 374 288 31 319 0 7 7 102 99 201 43 8 51

17h45 11 9 20 14 11 25 1 2 3 4 2 6 15 7 22 6 28 34 33 25 58 47 20 67 52 4 56 0 1 1 47 19 66 11 2 1318h00 9 2 11 10 14 24 1 4 5 1 0 1 11 13 24 3 37 40 20 31 51 36 23 59 22 10 32 0 3 3 28 28 56 8 1 918h15 10 6 16 6 10 16 0 3 3 2 1 3 10 7 17 18 44 62 22 25 47 28 30 58 25 8 33 3 1 4 31 21 52 7 0 7

18h30 8 2 10 9 3 12 2 0 2 7 1 8 6 13 19 9 27 36 19 16 35 24 20 44 22 4 26 0 3 3 21 23 44 8 1 9

TOTAL 38 19 57 39 38 77 4 9 13 14 4 18 42 40 82 36 136 172 94 97 191 135 93 228 121 26 147 3 8 11 127 91 218 34 4 38

6 hr 857 126 983 283 178 461 56 37 93 429 62 491 440 235 675 589 809 1398 639 572 1211 1035 427 1462 1264 174 1438 31 39 70 1614 708 2322 258 34 292

From the North - Left From the North - Straight

Date : 24/05/2016 Time Interval : 15 Min Time: 06:00 - 18:00


TIMEENDING Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total Light Taxi Bus Heavy Total

06h15 11 3 0 1 15 6 0 0 6 12 2 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 1 12 0 0 0 12 64 5 2 8 79 38 7 0 4 49 73 3 2 0 78 45 8 0 1 54 0 0 0 1 1 81 5 1 12 99 6 0 0 0 606h30 37 1 2 3 43 14 0 0 5 19 3 0 0 2 5 0 0 0 1 1 8 0 0 6 14 53 0 3 12 68 26 2 0 6 34 31 2 1 2 36 49 5 1 3 58 4 0 0 1 5 143 5 3 24 175 17 1 0 2 2006h45 95 6 2 3 106 16 0 0 7 23 2 0 0 3 5 0 0 0 0 0 21 0 0 15 36 77 6 4 20 107 21 0 1 11 33 29 0 3 6 38 59 2 1 2 64 2 0 0 0 2 166 2 2 15 185 15 0 0 0 1507h00 121 3 5 2 131 31 0 0 2 33 1 0 0 2 3 5 0 0 0 5 19 0 0 10 29 87 1 1 23 112 16 0 1 17 34 22 0 1 8 31 70 5 2 3 80 0 0 0 0 0 151 1 0 19 171 27 0 0 0 27TOTAL 264 13 9 9 295 67 0 0 20 87 8 0 0 8 16 6 0 0 1 7 60 0 0 31 91 281 12 10 63 366 101 9 2 38 150 155 5 7 16 183 223 20 4 9 256 6 0 0 2 8 541 13 6 70 630 65 1 0 2 6807h15 78 4 1 2 85 19 0 0 7 26 2 0 0 1 3 5 0 0 1 6 15 0 0 4 19 39 4 0 38 81 14 0 2 14 30 28 1 0 9 38 87 4 0 7 98 3 0 0 0 3 114 0 0 39 153 12 0 0 0 1207h30 47 0 0 0 47 14 0 0 3 17 3 0 0 2 5 3 1 0 0 4 32 0 0 14 46 28 0 1 38 67 16 2 0 18 36 34 2 0 11 47 109 2 0 6 117 2 0 0 0 2 119 0 0 31 150 19 0 0 1 2007h45 81 1 0 0 82 12 0 0 6 18 4 0 0 0 4 2 0 0 1 3 17 1 0 5 23 17 3 0 51 71 24 3 0 24 51 29 1 0 15 45 65 1 0 5 71 1 0 0 2 3 115 0 1 48 164 15 0 0 1 1608h00 72 3 0 4 79 7 0 0 1 8 3 0 0 2 5 1 0 0 1 2 22 1 0 12 35 30 0 1 58 89 28 0 0 27 55 32 3 0 18 53 45 2 0 7 54 1 0 0 1 2 91 0 0 37 128 5 0 0 1 6TOTAL 278 8 1 6 293 52 0 0 17 69 12 0 0 5 17 11 1 0 3 15 86 2 0 35 123 114 7 2 185 308 82 5 2 83 172 123 7 0 53 183 306 9 0 25 340 7 0 0 3 10 439 0 1 155 595 51 0 0 3 5408h15 47 1 0 2 50 7 0 0 4 11 0 0 0 1 1 5 0 0 1 6 14 0 0 11 25 33 0 0 37 70 20 1 0 19 40 18 2 0 10 30 35 1 0 5 41 0 0 0 0 0 83 1 0 49 133 11 0 0 1 1208h30 34 0 0 6 40 3 0 0 5 8 2 0 0 1 3 1 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 14 25 23 0 0 37 60 13 0 2 24 39 16 1 0 16 33 27 0 0 7 34 8 0 0 1 9 78 0 0 43 121 4 0 0 2 608h45 27 2 0 11 40 8 0 0 8 16 5 0 0 1 6 2 0 0 1 3 14 0 0 18 32 15 1 0 55 71 15 2 0 35 52 18 3 0 24 45 33 2 0 14 49 2 0 0 3 5 71 1 0 35 107 5 0 0 1 609h00 24 1 0 9 34 11 0 0 7 18 1 0 0 2 3 3 1 0 1 5 14 0 0 14 28 18 1 0 49 68 17 2 0 28 47 16 2 0 18 36 18 0 0 11 29 1 0 0 2 3 69 0 0 30 99 4 0 0 3 7TOTAL 132 4 0 28 164 29 0 0 24 53 8 0 0 5 13 11 1 0 3 15 53 0 0 57 110 89 2 0 178 269 65 5 2 106 178 68 8 0 68 144 113 3 0 37 153 11 0 0 6 17 301 2 0 157 460 24 0 0 7 31

15h15 18 0 0 6 24 13 1 0 6 20 5 0 0 1 6 62 0 0 10 72 13 3 0 8 24 6 1 0 14 21 35 0 0 31 66 65 1 1 24 91 53 0 0 10 63 2 0 0 1 3 23 4 0 39 66 11 0 0 1 1215h30 24 0 0 2 26 12 0 0 15 27 2 0 0 0 2 72 2 0 6 80 22 0 0 10 32 7 1 0 21 29 34 0 0 33 67 63 0 0 22 85 31 0 0 12 43 0 0 0 2 2 18 0 0 34 52 6 0 0 2 815h45 13 0 0 9 22 10 0 0 11 21 1 0 0 1 2 68 0 0 10 78 43 0 0 7 50 4 0 0 35 39 36 1 0 31 68 62 0 0 25 87 47 0 0 9 56 2 0 0 4 6 24 1 0 29 54 12 0 0 3 1516h00 16 0 0 12 28 15 0 1 7 23 7 0 0 2 9 47 0 0 7 54 36 0 0 12 48 6 0 0 33 39 32 0 0 30 62 60 0 0 27 87 50 0 0 11 61 0 0 0 6 6 18 1 1 26 46 11 0 0 4 15TOTAL 71 0 0 29 100 50 1 1 39 91 15 0 0 4 19 249 2 0 33 284 114 3 0 37 154 23 2 0 103 128 137 1 0 125 263 250 1 1 98 350 181 0 0 42 223 4 0 0 13 17 83 6 1 128 218 40 0 0 10 50

16h15 18 2 0 3 23 11 0 0 11 22 2 0 0 0 2 48 1 0 5 54 25 0 0 8 33 7 0 0 32 39 34 0 0 28 62 75 0 0 20 95 85 0 0 13 98 0 0 0 1 1 20 1 0 24 45 7 0 0 3 1016h30 13 2 1 8 24 10 0 0 16 26 1 0 0 2 3 53 0 0 11 64 23 0 0 3 26 7 0 0 40 47 39 0 0 25 64 73 0 0 22 95 76 1 0 6 83 0 0 0 1 1 17 1 2 17 37 7 0 0 2 916h45 14 0 0 4 18 16 0 0 5 21 4 0 0 0 4 28 0 0 2 30 18 1 0 8 27 4 0 0 24 28 35 0 0 31 66 70 0 0 25 95 71 0 0 7 78 0 0 1 3 4 36 1 1 31 69 18 1 1 2 2217h00 9 2 1 8 20 8 0 0 7 15 2 0 0 4 6 4 0 0 0 4 13 0 0 16 29 5 0 0 36 41 32 0 0 33 65 65 0 0 24 89 55 0 0 5 60 0 0 0 1 1 26 0 0 24 50 10 0 0 0 10TOTAL 54 6 2 23 85 45 0 0 39 84 9 0 0 6 15 133 1 0 18 152 79 1 0 35 115 23 0 0 132 155 140 0 0 117 257 283 0 0 91 374 287 1 0 31 319 0 0 1 6 7 99 3 3 96 201 42 1 1 7 51

17h15 10 1 0 9 20 13 1 0 11 25 1 0 0 2 3 4 0 0 2 6 15 0 0 7 22 6 0 0 28 34 32 1 0 25 58 47 0 0 20 67 52 0 0 4 56 0 0 0 1 1 47 0 0 19 66 11 0 0 2 1317h30 8 1 1 1 11 10 0 0 14 24 1 0 0 4 5 1 0 0 0 1 11 0 0 13 24 3 0 0 37 40 20 0 0 31 51 36 0 0 23 59 22 0 0 10 32 0 0 0 3 3 28 0 0 28 56 7 1 0 1 917h45 10 0 0 6 16 6 0 1 9 16 0 0 0 3 3 2 0 0 1 3 10 0 0 7 17 14 4 0 44 62 22 0 0 25 47 28 0 0 30 58 25 0 0 8 33 3 0 0 1 4 30 1 0 21 52 7 0 0 0 718h00 7 1 0 2 10 9 0 0 3 12 2 0 0 0 2 7 0 0 1 8 6 0 0 13 19 9 0 0 27 36 19 0 0 16 35 24 0 0 20 44 22 0 0 4 26 0 0 0 3 3 21 0 0 23 44 8 0 0 1 9TOTAL 35 3 1 18 57 38 1 1 37 77 4 0 0 9 13 14 0 0 4 18 42 0 0 40 82 32 4 0 136 172 93 1 0 97 191 135 0 0 93 228 121 0 0 26 147 3 0 0 8 11 126 1 0 91 218 33 1 0 4 38

6 hr 834 34 13 113 994 281 2 2 176 461 56 0 0 37 93 424 5 0 62 491 434 6 0 235 675 562 27 12 797 1398 618 21 6 566 1211 1014 21 8 419 1462 1231 33 4 170 1438 31 0 1 38 70 1589 25 11 697 2322 255 3 1 33 292


From the West - Right From the North - Left From the South - Left From the North - Straight From the West - Left From the North - Right From the East - Right From the South - Right From the East - Left From the East - Straight From the South - Straight From the West - Straight Time Period : 06h00 to 18h00Time Interval : 15 MinDate : 24/05/2016

Documents

Annexure D - Specialist Studies.pdf